JP7168482B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of playing games.

As shown in Patent Literature 1, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside .

JP 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007)

In a gaming machine such as that described in Patent Document 1, it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when setting the set values.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to appropriately notify the state of a game machine when the power supply is stopped when setting a set value .

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing control according to a set value,
setting permission state control means capable of controlling a setting permission state for permitting setting of the setting value;
setting confirmation state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value;
specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting permission state has been set;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
command transmission means capable of transmitting a command related to a game;
a game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and having display means capable of displaying the set values;
variable display means capable of executing variable display;
a pending storage means capable of storing, as pending storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
a signal output means capable of outputting a signal;
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the command transmitted from the command transmitting means;
and an informing means capable of informing that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state ,
the specific information is erased based on the completion of control of the setting permission state;
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped without the control of the setting permission state being terminated,
error notification means capable of executing error notification in the display means based on the fact that the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
The reserved storage is initialized when being controlled to the setting permission state,
when the setting confirmation state is controlled, the pending storage is not initialized;
The signal output means is
capable of outputting a specific signal when being controlled to the setting permission state;
capable of outputting the specific signal when being controlled to the setting confirmation state;
The setting confirmation state control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state to the setting confirmation state when power supply to the game machine is started and before the interrupt process is executed,
The interrupt processing is executed when the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt processing is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
The command transmission means is controlled to the setting permission state, to the setting confirmation state, and to neither the setting permission state nor the setting confirmation state. Also, before the interrupt process is executed, a setting command indicating the setting value can be transmitted to the effect executing means,
The notification about being controlled to the setting confirmation state is performed when being controlled to the setting confirmation state,
The specific signal is output until a predetermined period elapses after control to the setting confirmation state is completed after being controlled to the setting confirmation state.
It is characterized by

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the set value can be set according to the set value before and after the setting change. Gaming machines that display character images have been proposed. With regard to a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), when an effect suggesting a setting is executed In addition, it is preferable to make the game interesting to the player.
Another invention of the present application has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aims to improve the attraction of the presentation related to a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.
The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) will be reached;
Suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (fifth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings;
Specific effect control means ( Production control CPU 120) and,
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) controls the advance notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) (simulated display result indicating the display result of the variable display determined in the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start). consecutive effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach), the second display (second effect image 27TM200), and the notice effect corresponding to the second display (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach as images in the movie) ), and
The suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can make the mode of the suggestive effect corresponding to the first display and the mode of the suggestive effect corresponding to the second display different (first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution ratio (20%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestive presentation.
The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) controls the mode of the notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and the form of the notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to change the mode (the number of pseudo continuous effects (twice and once), the mode of cut-in images (“great chance!” and “chance!”), and appearance during super reach character (character B and character A))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (split effect) when the specific effect ends. Even after the end, it is the same as the effect information (images of friend character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B) and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed in the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. (The effect information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even after the end of the specific effect, either one of the first display and the second display continues to be updated, so that the enjoyment of the continuous updating of the display can be enjoyed. can make people feel

The gaming machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The suggesting effect is a first suggesting effect (first set suggesting effect) in which the ratio of displaying special displays (combination of [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] mini-slot symbols) differs according to the set value. including
A game machine characterized in that the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a first suggestive effect (first set suggestive effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The suggesting effect includes a second suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is "6"),
A gaming machine, wherein the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) corresponding to the second display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B5,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Operation prompting display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350) for prompting an operation;
An operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) that can set the operation unit (push button 31B) in an operation promoting mode (blinking mode) to prompt the operation,
The operation prompting display means (performance control CPU 120) provides an operation prompting display corresponding to the first display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) and an operation prompting display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed,
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not set the operation unit to the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), split effect is executed In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
Provided with an effect device that is operable when the specific effect is not being executed and is not operable when the specific effect is being executed However, if it is a variation pattern with a split effect, it is impossible to decide to execute the effect using a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Related information display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. In response to the execution of the effect [Y: strong], the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable object effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
A display (image liquid crystal panel) capable of parallax image display (stereoscopic image) in which an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye are alternately arranged in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal panel for image provided in front of the display for the left eye of the player. and a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the right-eye image from being viewed by the player and preventing the player from viewing the left-eye image by the right eye. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) restricts the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (does not display the stereoscopic image when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B9,
Corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display);
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display,
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in a region (first reserved display region 27TM011, active display region 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) restricts the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the pending display and the active display are changed). I try not to let them)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B10,
The notice effect control means (performance control CPU 120) provides a first notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the notice effect, and a second notice effect having a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice effect (two pseudo-continuous effects),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) in accordance with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in correspondence with the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in correspondence with the second display (second effect image having a short display period) The first effect image 27TM100 having a longer display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high expectation of a big hit than 27TM200.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the player expects that the first display is the one where the second notice effect is executed, and that the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , it is possible to improve the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B11,
Variable display means (CPU 103) for executing variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variation pattern), and the timing for ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A game machine characterized by setting one of a plurality of end timings (timing of TA1 and timing of TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, there is no need to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern with a specific effect, and excessive increase in storage capacity of effect data can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) will be reached;
Suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings;
Specific effect control means ( Production control CPU 120) and,
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) controls the advance notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) (simulated display result indicating the display result of the variable display determined in the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start). continuous effect, cut-in advance notice effect, super ready-to-win) and the notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) (pseudo-continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach as an image in the movie) can be executed. can be,
The suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the suggestive effect corresponding to the second display (in the second effect image display area 27TM200A in which the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed, it corresponds to the variation pattern The specified movie will be played, and the setting suggestion effect will not be executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by limiting the suggestive effect corresponding to the second display, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player due to the execution of the suggestive effect and improve the interest of the suggestive effect. .

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) controls the mode of the notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and the form of the notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to change the mode (the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (twice and once), the mode of the cut-in image (“Big Chance !!” and “Chance!”), and the appearance during Super Reach character (character B and character A))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (split effect) when the specific effect ends. Even after the end, it is the same as the effect information (images of friend character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B) and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed in the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. (The effect information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even after the end of the specific effect, either one of the first display and the second display continues to be updated, so that the enjoyment of the continuous updating of the display can be enjoyed. can make people feel

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
The suggesting effect is a first suggesting effect (first set suggesting effect) in which the ratio of displaying special displays (combination of [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] mini-slot symbols) differs according to the set value. including
A game machine characterized in that the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a first suggestive effect (first set suggestive effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The suggesting effect includes a second suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is "6"),
A gaming machine, wherein the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) corresponding to the second display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Operation prompting display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350) for prompting an operation;
An operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) that can set the operation unit (push button 31B) in an operation promoting mode (blinking mode) to prompt the operation,
The operation prompting display means (performance control CPU 120) provides an operation prompting display corresponding to the first display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) and an operation prompting display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed,
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not set the operation unit to the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), split effect is executed In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
Provided with an effect device that is operable when the specific effect is not being executed and is not operable when the specific effect is being executed However, if it is a variation pattern with a split effect, it is impossible to decide to execute the effect using a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Related information display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. In response to the execution of the effect [Y: strong], the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable object effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
a display (image liquid crystal panel) capable of parallax image display (stereoscopic image) in which images for the right eye and images for the left eye are alternately arranged in the horizontal direction; and a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the right-eye image from being viewed by the player and preventing the player's right-eye from viewing the left-eye image. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) restricts the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (does not display the stereoscopic image when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9,
Corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display);
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display,
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in a region (first reserved display region 27TM011, active display region 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) restricts the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the pending display and the active display are changed). I try not to let them)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10,
The notice effect control means (performance control CPU 120) provides a first notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the notice effect, and a second notice effect having a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice effect (two pseudo-continuous effects),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the updating of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) in accordance with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in correspondence with the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in correspondence with the second display (second effect image having a short display period) The first effect image 27TM100 having a longer display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high expectation of a big hit than 27TM200.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the player expects that the first display is the one where the second notice effect is executed, and that the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , it is possible to improve the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means A12 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A11,
Variable display means (CPU 103) for executing variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variation pattern), and the timing for ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A game machine characterized by setting one of a plurality of end timings (timing of TA1 and timing of TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, there is no need to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern with a specific effect, and excessive increase in storage capacity of effect data can be prevented.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-196126 (FIG. 23), an effect display area of an image display device is composed of a first effect display area and a second effect display area. A gaming machine has been proposed in which the ratio to the display area of the second effect display area can be changed. In a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that changes the display mode of the effect display area as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-196126 (FIG. 23), there is room for improving the interest of the effect. The configuration related to means C1 to means C14 shown below has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aims to improve the interest of the effect in a gaming machine capable of executing the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area. aim.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including an image display device (image display device 5) capable of displaying an effect image (image IM),
A three-dimensional object (object OB) is placed in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), and an image of the three-dimensional object (object OB) viewed from a specific viewpoint is projected in perspective. An image generation means (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123) that draws and generates an effect image (image IM) by
The image generation means (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123)
A predetermined image (effect image EG) imitating the effect display area (effect display area 27TM005A) of the image display device (image display device 5) and arranged in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space) perform a predetermined process (synthesis process) for associating with the three-dimensional object (object OB) obtained,
A three-dimensional object (object OB) subjected to the predetermined processing (combining processing) is changed (deformed or moved), and an image of the three-dimensional object after the change is viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0). A gaming machine characterized by generating a performance image (image IM) by rendering by perspective projection.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The predetermined image (effect image EG) includes update information (first effect information, second effect information) to be updated, and is used as the effect image (image IM) without performing the predetermined process (synthesis process). can be displayed on the image display device (image display device 5),
The image generation means (VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123) performs the predetermined processing (synthesis processing), a three-dimensional object (object OB ) is subjected to texture mapping based on the predetermined image (effect image EG), the texture-mapped three-dimensional object is changed (deformed or moved), and the three-dimensional object after the change (object OB) viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) is drawn by perspective projection to reproduce an effect image (image IM).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the image generating means.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Advantageous state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect control means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) will be reached;
Suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings;
Specific effect control means ( A gaming machine characterized by comprising a performance control CPU 120).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine of means C3,
The notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) controls the mode of the notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and the form of the notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to change the mode (the number of pseudo continuous effects (twice and once), the mode of cut-in images (“great chance!” and “chance!”), and appearance during super reach character (character B and character A))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
A gaming machine of means C3 or means C4,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other (split effect) when the specific effect ends. Even after the end, it is common to the effect information (images of friend character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B), and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed in the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. (The effect information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even after the end of the specific effect, either one of the first display and the second display continues to be updated, so that the enjoyment of continued display updating can be enjoyed. can make people feel

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C5,
The suggesting effect is a first suggesting effect (first set suggesting effect) in which the ratio of displaying special displays (combination of [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] mini-slot symbols) differs according to the set value. including
A game machine characterized in that the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a first suggestive effect (first set suggestive effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C6,
The suggesting effect includes a second suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is "6"),
A gaming machine, wherein the suggestive effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits a second suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect (setting 6 confirmed effect)) corresponding to the second display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C7,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Operation prompting display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying an operation prompting display (operation prompting display 27TM350) for prompting an operation;
An operation unit control means (production control CPU 120) capable of setting the operation unit (push button 31B) in an operation promoting mode (blinking mode) to prompt the operation,
The operation prompting display means (performance control CPU 120) provides an operation prompting display corresponding to the first display (operation prompting display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) and an operation prompting display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed,
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not put the operation unit into the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the divided effect is executed In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C8,
Provided with an effect device that is operable when the specific effect is not being executed and is not operable when the specific effect is being executed However, if it is a variation pattern with a split effect, it is impossible to decide to execute the effect using a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C9,
Movable body effect control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a movable body effect that moves the movable body (movable body 27TM600);
Related information display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect,
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed,
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. In response to the execution of the effect [Y: strong], the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable object effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C10,
A display (image liquid crystal panel) capable of parallax image display (stereoscopic image) in which an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye are alternately arranged in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal panel for image provided in front of the display for the left eye of the player. and a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the right-eye image from being viewed by the player and preventing the player from viewing the left-eye image by the right eye. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) restricts the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (does not display the stereoscopic image when the split effect is being executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the first display and the second display should be focused on.

The gaming machine of means C12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C11,
Corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding displays (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display);
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display,
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in a region (first reserved display region 27TM011, active display region 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display,
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) restricts the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the pending display and the active display are changed). I try not to let them)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means C13 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C12,
The notice effect control means (performance control CPU 120) provides a first notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the notice effect, and a second notice effect having a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice effect (two pseudo-continuous effects),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) in accordance with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in correspondence with the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in correspondence with the second display (second effect image having a short display period) The first effect image 27TM100 having a longer display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high expectation of a big hit than 27TM200.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the player expects that the first display is the one where the second notice effect is executed, and that the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , it is possible to improve the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means C14 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C13,
Variable display means (CPU 103) for executing variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to a variable display pattern (variation pattern), and the timing for ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A game machine characterized by setting one of a plurality of end timings (timing of TA1 and timing of TA2 as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, there is no need to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern with a specific effect, and excessive increase in storage capacity of effect data can be prevented.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of the setting suggesting effect, and (4) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting changing flag is set when power is turned on; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted before setting values are determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted after setting values are determined. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each piece of display information displayed on the image display device; It is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect determination process that is executed at the time of start winning. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a final display mode of active display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of active display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of pending display; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process performed at the time of a fluctuation start. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute an effect, (I1) and (I2) are used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, and are used to determine whether or not to execute an expectation level notice effect. (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the second change effect. (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a winning combination determination table for the expectation level advance notice effect, which is used when the first set suggestion effect is executed, and (L) is used when the first set suggestion effect is not executed. (M) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various production|presentations. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of mini-reel information; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of effect information in a split effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding division|segmentation production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for losing; It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for big hits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of starting winning a prize. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode for Movie A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode for Movie B; 4 is a time chart showing playback end timing of each movie. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to a pseudo-continuous performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining effect at the time of fluctuation start in the first embodiment; FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a third suggested effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a fourth suggested effect, and (C) is a cut-in notice effect. is an explanatory diagram showing an execution/non-execution decision table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a third setting suggestive effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect mode related to a fourth setting suggestive effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding a cut-in notice effect; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various production|presentations in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table for execution/non-execution of the fifth setting suggestion effect; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the fifth setting suggestion effect; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various production|presentations in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the second embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows a display control part. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a drawing method of three-dimensional image processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of synthesizing processing of effect images and objects; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change in which an object after compositing processing is rotated; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a viewpoint and an object in a virtual three-dimensional space; FIG. 4 is a screen diagram showing a display mode of an image projected on a virtual screen and a background image;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

In addition, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. there is The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lighting is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. In this example, the first reserved display area 5A for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second reserved display for displaying the reserved indication corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. Note that the LED 37 for hitting to the right is controlled to light up by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When game balls are detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, and is configured so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. It is In this way, by providing the nail row 19 that prevents the entry of the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area, the game ball can be shot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed hitting). operation), the game ball can win in the first start winning hole.

In addition, in this example, only when left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails, the game ball is configured to be able to win in the first start winning hole, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the first starting winning opening on the left side of the game area, or the first starting winning opening A hole may be provided on the left side of the game area and a line of nails 19 may be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting prize hole only when left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 .

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. A large winning opening positioned below the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved toward, and the opening control is executed to open the big winning opening serving as the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole are provided. 2, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged so as to be adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which game balls flow down is extended in the front-rear direction. By moving back and forth, the special winning port located below the bottom member and the second start winning port can be opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can win and a closed state (also called closed state) in which game balls cannot win. change to The special variable winning ball device 17 is a bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, and the opening control is executed to open the special prize winning opening serving as the prize winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved when the symbol is drawn out and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20, The opening control is executed to open the second start winning opening which is the winning area.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state, the ball moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B therebelow.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in an open state, the game ball falling into the second starting winning opening enters the special variable winning opening. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17 . On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. there is In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with regulation pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the motion of the forward/backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the control piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable prize ball device 6B is operated from the variable prize ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the big winning hole to get a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass through (enter) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special winning hole to obtain a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

In addition, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When game balls are detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning opening and the second start prize-winning opening may be collectively referred to as the start prize-winning opening or the start opening.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big win game or in a KT state (so-called small win time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In this pachinko game machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbols is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role of a normal starting area. However, even when a big win pattern is derived and displayed, the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the state shifts to a big win game state, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both the normal starting region and the operating region.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. .

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called left-hand hitting operation). When a game ball enters a first starting winning hole formed in a winning ball device 6A by a player's turning operation of a hitting ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to perform a left-handed operation, a first special symbol is displayed. A first special game is started by the device 4A.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the result is a "big hit". . Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing". It should be noted that even in the first special game, the small winning symbols may be stop-displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special game becomes ``big win'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth, and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state depending on the jackpot type.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small win game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big win game state, but the state is advantageous for the player.

In the high-base state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period of fluctuating special figures) than in the normal state (time saving state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, the KT state, and the high base state continue until one of the end conditions, such as execution of the special game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state, is met first. do. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut probability variation etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variable state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability of becoming, is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on) It is in a state where

When the jackpot game ends and the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation). A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern display device 20 starts a normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol varies depending on the type of big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the big winning symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the second special game becomes ``big hit'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the second special game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed).

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the lighting of the frame LED 9 Etc./turning off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100 . The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 83) from game control microcomputer 100, and outputs solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and for large winning entrance door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further controls a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hitting notification LED 37. It supplies it to the substrate 13 and supplies an LED signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control substrate 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 based on the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, LED lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the first special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized. (more on that later). Moreover, CPU103 performs a 2nd special design process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the second special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized. be. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal which is a process for outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the game machine outside the game machine processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big win game, during the small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the start prize to the first start prize winning port, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the first pending memory number, the look-ahead determination etc. to the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12 .

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S110A to S121A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result is determined. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing for determining either one. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process is completed. do.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. During the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where the variable display of the second special symbols results in a small hit and the game is controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the second small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing unless the small winning game is in progress. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the period of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the suspension period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decoration pattern, etc., resulting in an effect that gives the player a sense of incompatibility. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the normal state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small winning control, and no particular performance is performed, so the small winning ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small winning control and an effect emphasizing the small winning control is executed, the small winning ending period may be lengthened compared to the first KT state. . In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small winning fanfare period as the small winning opening preprocessing period may be changed according to the game state, similarly to the small winning ending period.

The first special symbol stop processing of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the variation of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the confirmed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. It contains the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is ``small hit'' or ``losing'', when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the KT state, or the high base state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

The first gate passage waiting process of step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special figure process flag is "4". In this first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 . When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first big hit opening preprocessing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "5". This first big win pre-opening process includes, for example, a process of making settings for starting a round in a big win game state and opening a big winning hole based on the fact that the display result is "big win". It is included. When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The first big hit opening process in step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "6". This first jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the big winning opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. , processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7". Then, the process during the opening of the first jackpot is terminated.

The first jackpot opening post-processing of step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "7". This first jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number of times, It includes a process of making settings for terminating the game state. Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, while the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the first special The value of the figure process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the first big hit post-opening process ends.

The first jackpot end process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "8". This first jackpot end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending performance is executed as a performance operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and processing corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control, KT control, and high base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot ending process ends.

The first small hit opening preprocessing of step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "9". This first small win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for opening the special winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". . At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit opening pre-processing ends.

The process during the opening of the first small hit in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "10". The processing during the opening of the first small prize includes the processing of measuring the elapsed time from opening the special winning opening, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not it has become. The value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11" when the special winning hole is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, and the processing during the opening of the first small winning is completed.

The first small hit end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "11". The first small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small winning end processing ends.

In addition, the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Also, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in a second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the second special symbol is varied. During the display, there is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the game is controlled to a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the first small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and if the small winning game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Incidentally, regarding the small winning control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small winning fanfare period and the small winning ending period may be varied depending on the game state.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control for operating various production devices such as actions is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 8-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting switch 22A and a second starting switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various parts are connected, and various production devices such as speakers 8L, 8R and frame LEDs 9 are connected to the production control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 mainly has a function of setting random numbers used in the special game, a function of inputting signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions, and a control board on the sub side consisting of the effect control board 12 etc. , a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal, and a function of outputting various types of information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, thereby performing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. and control the variable display of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal design display device 20 to control the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display device 20 It also has control functions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays various types of prize winning information. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and detection signals from various switches for game ball detection, as well as various signals such as a power off signal, a clear signal, a reset signal, etc. 100, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016.

8-1, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided in the center of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. (for example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower central portion of the back surface of the main substrate 11 . Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entering area" The number of game balls entered into the game ball is counted, and various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. In other words, on the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board so that the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether the game balls enter the general prize winning opening at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, setting values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, can be changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches are provided. When the power supply switch 21TM055 is operated by a game hall clerk or the like in a state in which the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, predetermined of operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is performed. executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. It is possible to operate only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. It may be a possible switch.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if force is not applied by the staff of the game arcade or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game arcade clerk or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent it from getting lost.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a mechanism for discharging the game balls that have entered the respective winning openings and the game balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (ejection port) is provided, and an ejection port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball ejected from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 .

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and decorations. It contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED for use.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout such as payout control board 21TM037 and ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer containing at least a RAM. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, and an I/O port constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is implemented by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Also, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full-tank switch 21TM048 and the payout count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main substrate 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and a game machine frame opening sensor that can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the door frame 3a is connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the game machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light-emitting element (LED) and a light-receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect jamming of game balls, that is, so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates that the ball is out, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the tank is full. , the ball delivery process is stopped.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a low level signal to the ball launching board 21TM090 to stop the ball launching from the ball launching device. Output a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. A full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094 A signal serving to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. For confirmation, signals (prize request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prizing ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals through the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and payout control microcomputer 21TM370. , when receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (receiving ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 It is configured to exchange specific data between For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing the predetermined bits of the prize ball request signal, A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with this setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100 . In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball rental, full tank, or ball out error) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 .

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a lent ball number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal boards (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board) via the output port 21TM372b. and) output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 of the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing to turn on/off is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. The input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 receives a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ready-to-use display lamp, a connecting stand direction display, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendable display signal are supplied from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. A connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is sent and received via input port 21TM372f and output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 8-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Also, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and upon detecting the falling edge of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to deliver a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drops the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC 24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

FIGS. 8-4A to 8-4F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display , the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is decided to make a big win (big win A to big win F) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F). Provided separately, the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. good too.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends according to the specified set value. FIGS. 8-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. FIG. 8-5(1) is an example in which a “sunny” mode ending image is selected in the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 8-5(2) is an example in which a “cloudy” mode ending screen is selected in the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 8-5(3) shows an example in which an ending image of "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 8-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting values specified by the setting command.

CPU103 has transmitted the setting command which designates the setting value to CPU120 for production control. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120 when the jackpot game state is ended. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting commands in the RAM 102 . For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state is over, the image display device 5 is stored together with characters (“BONUS end” characters) for notifying that the jackpot game state is over. It is possible to display the ending image in the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

The table shown in FIG. 8-5(4) shows the cases where the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when the mode of setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), when it is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 5 (3) is assigned a determination value for determining the "rain" mode.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the production (ending production), and at a medium rate (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion production (ending production) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2), and the medium (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, the effect control CPU120, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", at a low rate (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) Determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high percentage (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in the aspect in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is generated. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. will expect to be

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are normal values as the set values stored in the set value storage area, and six stages of set values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The set value 0 in this example corresponds to the set value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the set value 1 in this example corresponds to the set value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when shifting to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it has been decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the game state). If the value is 1, it is decided to execute RAM clear. This indicates that the In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM is not actually cleared. When the setting change mode is set, the RAM is cleared after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is non-set state). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. You can let it happen.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. The sensor 21TM300 outputs to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been detected to be open, and a detection signal that indicates that the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game controlling microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side , the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been opened to the game control microcomputer 100, and the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to steps S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When shifting to the setting change mode, it becomes possible to confirm and change the setting value, and when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, it becomes possible to confirm the setting value.

That is, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and there is no power interruption during the setting change ( NO at step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070). Or confirmation becomes possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (NO at step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later.

In this embodiment, in order to enter a state (setting confirmation mode) in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). On the condition that the setting value is changed, as will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. can't If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 or that there is some kind of illegality. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of setting value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is placed in the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Control is possible, but not limited to such a form, even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode may be controlled by none of the above.

On the other hand, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), control is not performed in either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is performed. (Transmission of setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if normal values (0 to 5) are stored in the setting value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is broken, the determination in step S21TM4010 is NO. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). will be controlled by mode. In addition, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. In addition, if the setting change mode has been controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the establishment of the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 to be described later). It will be.

At step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 are executed.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4120, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON at step S21TM4130 (NO at step S21TM4130), or if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON at step S21TM4140 If (NO in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 detects that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. The setting value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, it displays a message saying "the set value may be abnormal". Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn the power switch 21TM055 OFF), and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned ON). to perform an operation to change the set value (determine the set value). For example, it displays a message "After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode." It should be noted that the same notification may be made by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to indicate that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)." Even though there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (the determination of YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) has not been satisfied and the setting change mode has not been entered." Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a call lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). be done.

During the period of the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from accumulating in the 7-segment display and causing damage to the display. Also, the security signal is continuously output during the period of the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5 ), it is possible to identify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 continues until the power supply stops (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if power failure occurs during setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before proceeding to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value in the setting value storage area cannot be fixed to the normal value because the change of the setting value is not permitted. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the loop process described above (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed.

If the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed, the normal game processing cannot be performed. not. In this manner, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not established, the power is once turned off, and the conditions (1) to (3) are all established when the power is turned on next time. Then, the setting change mode is entered, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to the normal value.

It should be noted that the CPU103, if any of the conditions of (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the predetermined By emitting light in the power-off instruction mode, the power may be urged to be turned off.

In this embodiment, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting change flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (YES in step S21TM4130), the control to the setting confirmation mode is not performed even if the two conditions are satisfied. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in either setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the processing of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the regular value (one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. If the set value storage area does not store a normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, in the set value storage area as the normal value. is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure has been input. Immediately before the device becomes inoperable due to the stoppage, the power supply stoppage processing is executed. In the power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled (repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650), the power supply If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be executed appropriately in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the values (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the game hall clerk normally recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall clerk may actually setting value may be mistakenly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area +1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 determines that the setting value has been changed. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility that the Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is set (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated setting values are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the game arcade clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is set (when the power is turned on or when the power was cut off last time) is 3. If so, the set values stored in the set value storage area are updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and transmit the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650). ) and updating of the setting value (step S21TM4620) corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (determined as YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (determined as NO in step S21TM4040 to set the RAM clear flag). remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the set value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070 or S21TM4130) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040 or S21TM4140). is determined and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing from step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

At step S21TM4680, if lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES at step S21TM4680), CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and sets the value of the security signal timer to 1000 ms (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal game process is started. will be For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the output of the security signal is started (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are started. The value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in response to the end of control in any of the modes. set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the processing for starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether control is performed in the setting change mode or in the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Also, in the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710, regardless of whether the control was performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is necessary to determine which mode the control was in). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the output control of the security signal is simplified by making the security signal output start control and output end control common between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set as a security signal in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It's set on a timer. However, if the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting change mode control, which mode the external device side selects. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting change mode is set, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, once the security signal is cleared in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000 ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000 ms in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared. there is That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 1 second has elapsed since the setting change mode was set, and 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode was terminated.

Specifically, if it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after interrupt permission In the processing (for example, information output processing), when the security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM is cleared, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal is continued until the In addition, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms ) to 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the game control timer interrupt process may be performed.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode and the control in the setting change mode are finished, and the control is performed in the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the control in the setting change mode was completed. With such a configuration, the output period of the security signal can be made different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process was executed and the setting change mode was controlled. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled without executing the initialization process. It is possible to presume that there is a possibility that the change processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

Note that the security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area (an area cleared by initialization processing) of the RAM 102 based on the detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, since RAM clear is not executed, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output process. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for four minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period until one second elapses after the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power recovery, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs At times, it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal is output for a period of 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode (depending on the execution of RAM clearing). period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, for example, 50 ms or longer. That is, a common security signal timer value of 50 ms may be set for both when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored when the power is subsequently turned off. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the setting value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed as it is on the side of the effect control CPU 120. If they are displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set values. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the effect control CPU 120 side, the value specified by the setting command (0 to 5) plus 1 is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 Within the range, a production that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, not limited to such a form, CPU103 is set to the setting command the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area, effect control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command are displayed as they are on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Also, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends according to the specified set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). YES at S21TM4020), and no power interruption occurred during the setting change (NO at step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4040). ), it is sufficient to execute the power-off recovery process without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and the game control timer interrupt processing (special (including pattern process processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power failure recovery, and the normal game processing is started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), based on the data at the time of power supply stoppage, the restoration from the power interruption was performed (RAM clear is not performed ). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, the restoration from the power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop. (RAM clear is not performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150 and it is decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute power-on processing that accompanies RAM clearing.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing for setting the value of the security signal timer to 30 seconds, and processing for when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , It is sufficient to shift to the game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.) after the interrupt permission.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) is cleared, and the initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value is unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining per normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized to In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is that (a) if control is not performed in the setting change mode, the set value storage area does not contain the normal values when the power is turned on; (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is set, the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or if the value in the setting change mode is This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the top address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the table set at initialization in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for judging a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, a special symbol process flag, etc. An initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the later-described game control timer interrupt processing, big hit determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this initialization command, the initialization process is performed (RAM clearing is performed without recovery from power interruption based on the data at the time of power supply stop). recognized). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, initialization of the game state etc. (data at the time of power supply stop) It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the security signal timer value (1 second) set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. If the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second). ), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second set in step S21TM4710. remain.

At this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the value of the security signal timer is set, so that the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process), After that, every time the timer interrupt process for game control is executed by interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. will be

Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process can be executed, and the process shifts to the normal game process. In this embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and a random number for determining whether or not to be a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit. Random number update processing is processing for updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value determines the initial value of the count value of the counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number for A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as a performance display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself). processing, or processing of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as gaming device control processing), the count value of the normal per symbol determination random number is one cycle (normal per symbol determination random number After stepping by the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum possible values, an initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a ), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) is shifted to, but in such a form However, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game hall clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to switch the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state etc. (execute RAM clearing). In addition, by turning ON the lock switch 21TM051 and turning OFF the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state, etc. is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the game hall clerk can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state and the like. there is

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the setting value to be confirmed on the game arcade side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the game stop state (step loop processing of S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, the game is started in an unstable state (game control timer interrupt processing is executed), and when the power is turned on, the power It is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled to the setting change mode when the interruption occurred.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 determines the condition for shifting to the setting change mode ( Steps S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not established, the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor in the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) 21TM029 displays an error by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, by displaying the character "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D that constitute the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall clerk will be notified of the occurrence of an abnormality (in the setting change mode). (the possibility that a power outage may have occurred in a controlled state) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the set value abnormality error command, displays a message on the image display device 5, "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode." After turning off the power once (turning off the power switch 21TM055), when the power is turned on again (when turning on the power switch 21TM055), the clerk or the like is instructed to shift to the setting change mode and change the setting value. (fix the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130); and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140). YES), control is performed in the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. Please let me shift to the setting change mode.") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the fact that the image display device 5 was controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052) ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, it is possible to cause the image display device 5 to display a message "You are in setting change mode" or a message "Please perform a setting change operation to change the setting value". As a result, a game arcade clerk or the like can understand that the control is in the setting change mode, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed. is changed to the set value as planned, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the set value can be fixed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, one of the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions are not met, without being controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after sending the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) . As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. to switch to the setting change mode.") will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to switch to the setting change mode." It is reported that the state is not established. In this case, the store clerk or the like at the game parlor understands that the setting change mode is not controlled and the game is in the stopped state (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again after operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. In the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to the state, it is possible to fix the set value and shift the pachinko game machine 1 to the normal game processing.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in the case of (a) that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored, an error is displayed on the main substrate 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029). The mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being interrupted, so that unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be properly changed.

On the other hand, in the case of (b) where the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored, it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is interrupted during the setting change mode. Therefore, the game is forcibly stopped (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is stopped. will be done. As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and transition condition (i ) to (iii) are not established, a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the setting value may be abnormal and the transition to the setting change mode has been performed (or the transition condition has been satisfied). , and the effect control CPU 120 that receives this command displays an image of the message "There is a possibility that the setting value is abnormal" and the message "It will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode." It is preferable to display it on the device 5 . On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. In response to that (turned from OFF state to ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, (2) setting changeover switch (clear switch ) 21 TM052 is operated (turned from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 .

Then, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though there is no such operation, and notify that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, the store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade clearly grasps that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, It is possible to check whether the

In addition, not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is operated or not, and The lock switch operation command and setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period in which the normal game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 .

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the setting change mode was entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

As shown in FIG. 8-11, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. Alternatively, the RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the setting change mode may be entered (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the condition is satisfied.

In the processing shown in FIG. 8-11, if the result of the data check in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without judging whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. 8-6 is different from the process shown in FIG. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a configuration, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the setting change mode is entered. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. and the setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed), if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the mode to the setting change mode irrespective of whether or not is established, it is possible to improve the workability for fixing the set value.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting It will be controlled in change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determination of YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the game arcade clerk who has changed the setting value must once turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to finalize the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the setting change mode control is determined whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). are made different, while the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode. Appropriately transitioning to normal game processing is made.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), it is possible to issue a notification prompting the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Execute corresponding processing), and the effect control CPU 120 that has received the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, ``Turn ON the lock switch once, and switch it to OFF after changing the set value.'' A message may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

In the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, so that the game machine 1 can be set in the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take measures to determine the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is set. This is because, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit differs depending on the set value. For example, the random number for judging a big hit extracted at the time of starting winning before changing the setting is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before change, but it is judged to be a failure in relation to the setting value after change. , Conversely, an event may occur in which a win is determined in relation to the set value before change, but is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the start winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process processing is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the reserved memory (special design reserved memory, ordinary design reserved memory) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the reserved memory number is set to the initial value (0). there is

In addition, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interruption permission of step S21TM1540 not being performed, the switch processing in the game control timer interruption processing (step S21 shown in FIG. 4) is not performed. , starting prizes, gate passage, etc. are invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like are not yet executed during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, and the random number is not updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, the random number will be the same regardless of the timing of the start winning, and the game will be played based on such a random number. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the start winning and gate passage are invalidated.

(Set value memory control when power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, setting value storage control in the case where a power failure occurs during setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 8 shows the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power supply is interrupted before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends). -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, "0" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to "0" based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed, power failure occurs. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned ON (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned ON) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in turn 6, the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when applying the control shown in FIG. Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the 6th and 7th turns may be the OFF state.

In this way, if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power supply is interrupted. , the setting value after change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power supply is restored, there are cases where the set values have already been set, and in this case, the game arcade clerk terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set values again. Since it is sufficient to shift the game machine to the normal game process by pressing the button, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power failure occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode, Description will be made with reference to FIG. 8-12(2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the fixed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power supply switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in sequence 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in Figures 8-12 (1) and (2), when the power supply is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set values that have been changed in accordance with the previous setting change operation in the setting change mode, that is, the set values that were stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , are valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area at the time of power restoration).

Note that the control is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is operated. 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). state to the OFF state) is performed, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to determine the setting value. can be In this case, the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting values (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is also changed according to the change of the setting value stored in the .

With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting If the power is cut off without completing the operation for terminating the change mode (without the lock switch 21TM051 being switched to the OFF state), the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 will be It means that it has not been changed from the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). In other words, in the power supply stop state, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area at the time of the previous power-on are continuously held. Therefore, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set after the power is restored are stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time. It will be the value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for gaming machines with different jackpot probabilities according to the setting values Although it is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5 It can also be applied to a game machine in which the jackpot probability is 1/300.

In addition, the following inventions are disclosed in this characterizing portion 21TM.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting changing means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value etc. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of the control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
Specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal at step S21TM4560) for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode; ,
setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (security signal timer value) relating to the period in which the specific signal is output;
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (one second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation mode). Upon termination, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was terminated, and upon termination of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the termination of the setting change mode. do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled in the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode. Continue to output security signals until 30 seconds have passed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output for at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value in both cases when the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode are finished, and the setting change is performed. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while the setting processing by the setting means is made common. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without a specific operation (detection of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680) for ending the setting change mode. in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Equipped with a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on this,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during control of the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the external device of the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
In the setting change mode, power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). In the specific information storage means (the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing specific information when stopped, a setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is completed. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to send an error command to the effect control means while executing error notification in the display means (send a set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190, and display monitor in the error display of step S21TM4210 21TM029 can display the letter "E"),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to enter the setting change mode. Please let me migrate" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The inventions relating to the means P1 to P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a game machine that appropriately notifies the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated). A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on that,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), error notification means capable of executing error notification (game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means confirms that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting can be controlled to the setting change mode based on the changeover switch (21TM052 is ON state),
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are all executed). Based on the determination of YES, the process shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed to the setting change mode without executing the error notification. Can encourage change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the power is turned on, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140) ), the process proceeds to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
and the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit the set value abnormal error command in step S21TM4190 and display in the error display of step S21TM4210 It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to enter the setting change mode. Please let me migrate" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set values. The inventions relating to means Q1 to Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated). A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on that,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) is set), control to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON, regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the game state.
The gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the game state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). A game control microcomputer 100 that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
If the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, automatically control to the setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, when a power failure occurs during setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. is executed), and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and when being controlled in the setting change mode It is possible to end the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled in the setting change mode (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. Erasing the specific information when the setting change mode ends based on (clearing the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control ends),
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, automatically control to the setting change mode), and terminate the setting change mode based on the specific operation (end the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). let)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the conditions for ending the control in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation performed while being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610, change the set value stored in the set value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). based on the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means is configured to change the value in the setting change mode by the change operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled. (The setting value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is cleared. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
The setting change mode control means stores in the setting value storage area when a change operation is performed under control in the setting change mode and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. changing only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on a specific operation after the change operation; The setting change mode is ended (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area). to confirm it as a valid set value and exit the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means stores the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled. (Even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched OFF, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is stored. is not changed, so if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled by the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 16TM will be described. 9-1 (A1) and (B1) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of pending display and active display in this embodiment. The pending display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols that have not been executed, and the active display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols that are being executed. In this embodiment, a first reserved display area 16TM011 in which a first reserved memory number (first reserved display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is displayed is provided in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. 5 is provided with an active display area 16TM013 in which an active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state), a mini- Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini-slot 16TM030 as if it were the base of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at the position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily understand that the mini-slot 16TM030 will execute an effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. can be done.

In this embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not variable display of special symbols is being executed (whether or not variable display of decorative symbols is being executed) and regardless of the number of pending memories. information.

When the first reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 16TM001 corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 16TM011. That is, in the first pending display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning port) is established, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and it is controlled to the jackpot game state. and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) is. When a plurality of first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011, the first reserved displays 16TM001 correspond to the first reserved displays 16TM001 in the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (in order from the right as seen from the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays an active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 indicates that after the starting condition (for example, winning the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port) is established, the starting condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game It is information corresponding to the variable display of special symbols (and the variable display of decorative symbols) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the upper center area of the image display device 5, in which the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable and stationary manner, is arranged from left to right in a pattern display area 5L, a pattern display area 5C, and a pattern display area 5C. A pattern display area 5R is assumed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the special symbol, which is a symbol smaller than the decoration symbol displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5, is variably displayed. A symbol indicating whether or not a special symbol is displayed is referred to as a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area are selected from the left in the upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the small patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are variably displayed and stopped. 5r. The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to a low probability low base state (normal state), mini-slot in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. The symbols are variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display to be described later, as shown in FIG. Mini-slot symbols of "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu" and "FEVER", which are symbols composed of hint characters, are variably displayed.

(First mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state), the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol, the variation of the small symbol display) is executed, mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 (areas corresponding to each of the three reels in the slot machine) are divided into three of "left", "middle" and "right". ), the first mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) can be executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one row (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. In the following description, the term "variable display" simply means variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to variable display of special symbols, or variable display of small symbols.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), in each of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels), "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", A plurality of mutually identifiable patterns such as "cherry", "7", and "blank (horizontal linear object (-) in this example)" are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols are stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, and a combination of symbols called a winning combination is completed, the winning combination is established. The winning hand may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination of different symbols. Successful hands in this embodiment are a combination of identical symbols and a combination of different symbols. In addition, in the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is "lost".

In this embodiment, the winning combination is established when the same symbols are combined. For example, when the same symbol combination of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] is arranged in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of "Bell" is established. Similarly, if the combination of the same pattern of [Watermelon], [Watermelon], and [Watermelon] is complete, the role of "Watermelon" is established, and if the combination of the same pattern of [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] is complete, " The combination of the same symbols of [7], [7], and [7] is established, and the combination of "7 matching" is established. However, when the combination of the same symbols of [Blank], [Blank], and [Blank] are arranged in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, it is handled in the same way as when the winning combination is "lost".

(Second mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first mini-slot variable display is executed (after any of the above-described winning hands are established), the mini-slot is not divided into a plurality of slots. In a single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (an area corresponding to one reel), it is possible to execute a second mini-slot variable display in which mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display). be. In the second mini-slot variable display, mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), mutually distinguishable characters such as "no display", "CHANCE", "hot heat", and "FEVER" are displayed. A plurality of types of patterns are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In this embodiment, the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed) by the displayed characters. is suggested to be a “big hit”.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the number of times of variable display executed after the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state) is counted. A change number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the change number counter is displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . The value indicated by the variable count display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variable displays executed in the normal state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), "125" is displayed as the variable count display 16TM040, and the variable display has already been executed 124 times since the game state shifted to the normal state, It shows a state in which the 125th variable display is currently being executed.

Here, the change count display 16TM040 changes from a normal mode (for example, a white mode) to a setting suggestion mode different from the normal mode (for example, a white mode) by executing a second setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the setting value of the gaming machine. For example, it changes to a purple aspect).

Note that the display mode of the change number display 16TM040 may be changed from the normal mode (for example, white mode) to the normal mode and the above-described setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) based on the display result of the executed variable display. A notice effect (for example, referred to as a second expectation degree notice effect) of changing to a degree notice mode (for example, a red mode) may be executed. However, in the same variable display, both the second set suggestive effect and the second expectation level advance notice effect are not executed, and if it is decided to execute the second set suggestive effect, the second set suggestive effect in the variable display It is assumed that the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation level announcement effect.

FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing a change effect determination process executed at the time of start winning. Effect control CPU120 executes the change effect determination process at the time of start winning shown in FIG.

In the start winning change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first issues a set of start winning commands based on the occurrence of the start winning to the first start winning port (for example, symbol designation command, variable category command , and the first reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S16TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not the big hit will be determined among the results of determination at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win will occur and the type of the big win in the case of a big win based on the random number for judging the big win and the random number for judging the kind of the big win extracted at the time of starting winning, and designates the result of the judgment. Output the specified command. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be a normal reach or whether or not it will be a super reach based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of the start winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. do. Further, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores a set of commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine whether or not If a new set of starting winning commands has not been received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process ends.

If one set of starting winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display by referring to the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (A)), which will be described later. (see step S16TM1010). It should be noted that the final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is the final display color of the active display determined at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, there are cases where the notice characters are superimposed on the active display in response to execution of the expectation level notice effect described later. In other words, there is a possibility that the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of starting winning may change from the final display mode of the active display based on the effect determination process at the start of the variation.

FIG. 9-3A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in this embodiment, any of "normal mode (white mode)", "blue mode", and "red mode" is selected as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003. Decision values are assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the starting winning The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 70%, and the blue mode (blue display) at a rate of 25%. circular display), and at a rate of 5%, it becomes a red mode (red circular display).

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is the normal mode at a rate of 10%, the blue mode at a rate of 30%, and the red mode at a rate of 60%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change pattern and whether or not the first change effect is executed and the number of times of execution based on the active display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-3 (B)). (step S16TM1020).

FIG. 9-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a table for determining a change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 001 to 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), when the active display at the time of the active shift is in the normal mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the start winning prize is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the designated judgment result is "no"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is the change pattern 001 with a probability of 70%. The decision values are assigned so that the variation pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 25% and the variation pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 10% for the change pattern 001, selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 002, and selected with a probability of 60% for the change pattern 003. Judgment values are assigned so that

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated. will execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a first change effect suggesting that there is a possibility of changing. This first change effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and the failure mode is changed. When the first change effect of is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed. Also, the first change effect is a effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character affects the active display, but does not change the appearance of the active display.

The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 001 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 003 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, design designation If the judgment result specified by the command is "no"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 30% change pattern 011. The pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 27%, the pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 23%, the pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 5%. A judgment value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the change pattern 011, selected with a probability of 10% for the change pattern 012, and selected with a probability of 15% for the change pattern 013. The judgment values are assigned so that the variation pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 20%, the variation pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the variation pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 013 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 015 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed after the first change effect of the success mode is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, design designation If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is that change pattern 021 is 35%. The pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 25%, the pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 20%, the pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the change pattern 021, selected with a probability of 15% for the change pattern 022, and selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 023. , and the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 25% and the variation pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 024 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 025 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pending display change pattern based on the pending display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-4 (C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and continues the process as it is. finish.

FIG. 9-4(C) is a diagram for determining the change pattern of the pending display for one pending memory when the first pending memory number stored in the first pending memory number saving area is "1". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 101 to 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "miss"), the change pattern 101 is 100% as the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory). Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is assigned a judgment value so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified judgment result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 102 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified judgment result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 103 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 9-4, the active shift means that the first suspension display 16TM001 shifts from the first suspension display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, it becomes the determination target at the time of starting winning). display of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display).

In this embodiment, the display mode is not changed when the first reserved display 16TM001 shifts from the first reserved display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013. That is, the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift matches the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 is not changed during the active shift. You can let me.

FIG. 9-4(D) is for determining the change pattern of the pending display for two pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "2". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 201 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 202 is 40%. Selection is made with a probability, and judgment values are assigned so that the variation pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is assigned a judgment value so that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%. there is

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 204 is 10%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30% and the variation pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by .

FIG. 9-4(E) is for determining the change pattern of the pending display for three pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "3". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 301 to 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 301 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 302 is 20%. The decision values are assigned so that the pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20% and the pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by .

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in red mode, (1) When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified judgment result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 305 is 13%. is selected with a probability, the variation pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%, the variation pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the variation pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the variation pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%. A determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 20% for the change pattern 305, selected with a probability of 20% for the change pattern 306, and selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 307. , the variation pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 13%, the variation pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the variation pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 9-4(F) is a diagram for determining the change pattern of the pending display for four pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "4". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the designated determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 401 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 402 is 20%. The decision values are assigned so that the variation pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%, the variation pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the variation pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. . On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 402 is selected with a probability of 30%, the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 30%. , and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 406 is 3%. is selected with a probability, the variation pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%, the variation pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 3%, the variation pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the variation pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 10%. selected, the variation pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 10%, the variation pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the variation pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 15%. , the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 16%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) is that the change pattern 406 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%. , the variation pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the variation pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 7%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the variation pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the variation pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory count subtraction command)
and is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 .

The effect control CPU 120 executes a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content ( Reach, pseudo-run, etc.), based on the reception of a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbols is executed, and the special symbols It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the contents of the production (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 9-5 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is specified as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-6(G)) (step S16TM2000). .

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect as the effect of suggesting the currently set setting value. In this first setting suggestion effect, a combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] as a combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. By doing so, it is a production that the role of "Bell" is established. That is, based on the stop display of the combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player can set the set value. It recognizes that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting has been executed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 9-6(G), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97% and to execute it at a rate of 3%. Further, when the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 96% and to execute it at a rate of 4%. Further, when the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 95% and to execute it at a rate of 5%. Further, when the set value is "4", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 94% and to execute it at a rate of 6%. Further, when the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 93%, and to execute it at a rate of 7%. Further, when the set value is "6", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 92% and to execute it at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Become. In the present embodiment, the processing for determining the effect at the time of starting the variation is executed each time the variable display is performed, so whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is to be executed is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the above-mentioned first mini-slot variable display is [Bell] or "Loss". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed. The player is also interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to guess the set value for each variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestive effect (YES in step S16TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed when executing the first set suggestive effect. (Step S16TM2020). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120, which will be described later.

FIG. 9-6 (H1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level announcement effect when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "no". In the execution/non-execution determination table 1 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each variation pattern for loss. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds). In addition, when the variation pattern is "no normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100%. Also, if the variation pattern is "super reach lost" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 60%, and to execute it at a rate of 40%. do.

FIG. 9-6 (H2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "big hit". In the execution/non-execution determination table 1 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each of the big win variation patterns. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "normal reach big hit" (variation time is 30 seconds). Also, when the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 20%, and to execute it at a rate of 80%. do.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2), whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern (variation time). In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). second), it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 100%, and if the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds), the expectation level announcement effect is performed. It is decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute an expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 80%.

When a variation pattern with a short variation time (non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), normal reach big hit (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level notice effect There is not enough time to execute the production of Therefore, when a variable display based on a variation pattern with a short variable time is executed, although the first set suggestion effect can be executed, the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed after the first set suggestion effect is executed. there is

On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a long variation time (loss of super reach (120 seconds), big hit of super reach (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level notice effect are produced. Sufficient time is provided for execution. Therefore, it is possible to execute the expectation degree announcement effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the variable time. If the variable time is short, the variable time is long. In either case, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a common rate. On the other hand, the expectation level announcement effect is executed at a higher rate when the variable time is long than when the variable time is short. That is, when the variation time of the variable display to be executed is short, the variation time of the variable display to be executed is longer than the [ratio of execution of the expectation degree announcement effect after the first setting suggestion effect is executed]. The [percentage of the execution of the expectation level announcement effect after the execution of the first setting suggestion effect] is higher.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation level announcement effect (YES in step S16TM2030), the display result to stop display in the above-described second mini-slot variable display and the second change Whether or not to execute an effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6(J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect is to change the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on "a character pattern as a display result stopped in the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. It is a production that makes In this embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display is a display result of "no display" in which the character pattern is not displayed. Become. On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

FIG. 9-6(J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation degree announcement effect, the character pattern is a mini-slot as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display. It is possible to determine either "no display", which is a display result not displayed in the symbol display area 5LCR1, or "CHANCE", "rapid heat", and "FEVER", which are character symbols, and each of these displays can be determined. A judgment value is assigned to each result.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), when the display result of the variable display is "loss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "loss"), the variation 70% of the time, "No Display" is selected, 25% of the time, "CHANCE" is selected, and 5% of the time, "Extreme Heat" is the display result of the second mini-slot variable display performed in the display. is selected.

On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the second mini-slot variable executed in the variable display As a display result of the display, "no display" was selected at a rate of 22%, "CHANCE" was selected at a rate of 35%, "great heat" was selected at a rate of 40%, and "" was selected at a rate of 3%. FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of the big win is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(J), regarding the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display for 1 reel), "no display"<"CHANCE"<"hot heat"<"FEVER" Expectations for a big hit are high in this order. Therefore, when any character pattern of "CHANCE", "rapid heat", and "FEVER" is stopped (when the second change effect is executed after that), none of the character patterns are stopped and displayed. The ratio of winning big is higher than when the result is "no display" (when the second change effect is not executed after that). In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the character pattern to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In this embodiment, when the character pattern (either of "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu", and "FEVER") stops as a result of the display of the second mini-slot variable display, the display mode of the active display is changed. A second change effect is executed. Specifically, in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (reel 1) of the mini-slot 16TM030, when any character symbol of "CHANCE", "Gekiatsu" and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed, (i) The stopped character pattern moves upward from the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 9-10 (11)), (ii) The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon showing the same characters as the character pattern that resulted in the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character pattern resulting from the display is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a successful combination of the expectation degree previous notice effect, which is used when executing the first set suggestion effect, in the expectation degree previous notice effect establishment combination determination table 1 (see FIG. 9-7 (K)). (step S16TM2050) and proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7(K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the established combination determination table 1 of the expectation level advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect, more specifically, the expectation level As a winning combination (hereinafter the same) of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the notice effect, "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", Any one of "cherry (freeze)", "7 matching", and "7 matching (freeze)" can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each winning combination.

In the present embodiment, when "lost" is selected as the establishment combination of the expectation level notice effect, the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 stop and display combinations of mini-slot patterns including different patterns. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5R1, the expectation level notice effect is established. It becomes a "misalignment".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 matching" are selected as the roles for which the expectation level notice effect is to be established, mini-games with the same symbols are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. The slot pattern is stopped and displayed. For example, when a combination of mini-slot symbols [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] are stopped and displayed as combinations of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the expectation level notice effect is established. becomes "watermelon".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" and "cherry (via replay)" are selected as the establishment role of the expectation level notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 are displayed with the same symbols. After the combination of mini-slot symbols [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] is stopped and displayed, the mini-slot symbols are changed again in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 to display the mini-slot symbols. A combination of mini-slot symbols of [Watermelon], [Watermelon], [Watermelon], or a combination of mini-slot symbols of [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] as a combination of the same symbols in areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. stop display.

In the present embodiment, when "Cherry (Freeze)" and "7 Matching (Freeze)" are selected as establishment roles of the expectation level notice effect, the normal mode ( After executing the variable display of the mini-slot symbols in a freeze mode different from the scroll display and update display from the top to the bottom), [Cherry], [Cherry], [Cherry] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 ] or the combination of mini-slot symbols [7], [7], [7] is stopped. The variable display of the freeze mode in this embodiment means that the mini-slot pattern display that scrolls upward from the bottom or updates the display while the visibility of the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is lowered. Variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed) case), the successful combination in the expectation degree announcement effect is “lost” at a rate of 100%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " CHANCE"), the winning role in the expectation level notice effect is "lost" at a rate of 5%, "suica" at a rate of 45%, and "suica (via replay)" at a rate of 20%. , 20% of the time it will be "cherry", 2% of the time it will be "cherry (via replay)", and 8% of the time it will be "cherry (freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "hot heat" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is 15% of the time, 10% of the time, 'Watermelon (via replay)', and 40% of the time, 'Watermelon'. 10% of the time it will be "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 25% of the time it will be "Cherry (Freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is " FEVER"), the successful combination in the expectation level announcement effect is "7 matching" at a rate of 70% and "7 matching (freeze)" at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 9-7(K), when the winning hand is "lost", the stop symbol is "no display" or "CHANCE", and when the winning hand is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stop symbol ( The character icon) becomes "CHANCE" or "rapid heat", and when the winning combination is "7 matching", the stop symbol (character icon) becomes "FEVER". Further, when the winning hand is "miss", the stop symbol "no display" is more likely to be selected than "CHANCE", and when the winning hand is "watermelon", the stop symbol (character icon) is "hot heat". ``CHANCE'' is more likely to be selected than ``CHANCE'', and when the winning combination is ``Cherry'', ``Super heat'' is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol (character icon) than ``CHANCE''.

That is, regarding the second mini-slot variable display stop symbol, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state increases in the order of "no display"<"CHANCE"<"extreme heat"<"FEVER". With respect to the established combination of variable mini-slot display, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is high in the order of "lost"<"watermelon"<"cherry"<"seven match". In addition, when "7 matching" is selected as the winning combination of the first variable display of the mini-slot, the stop symbol of the second variable display of the mini-slot is always "FEVER", so "7 matching" is a big hit. It is a production of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state according to the established combination composed of a plurality of kinds of mini-slot symbols, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-7(K), the successful combination accompanied by the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "7 matching (freeze)". Then, when "Cherry (Freeze)" is selected as the winning hand, the display result (character icon) becomes "CHANCE" or "Gekiatsu", and when "7 Matching (Freeze)" is selected as the winning hand. , the notice character (character icon) is "FEVER". That is, when the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed in the frozen mode, the established combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "7 matching") is determined, so the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed in the normal mode. The degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when performing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestive effect (NO in step S16TM2010), it selects whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed when the first set suggestive effect is not executed. (Step S16TM2120).

FIG. 9-6 (I1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "no". In the execution/non-execution determination table 2 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each variation pattern for loss. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds). Also, when the variation pattern is "normal reach out" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute it at a rate of 20%. . Also, if the variation pattern is "super reach lost" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 40%, and to execute it at a rate of 60%. do.

FIG. 9-6 (I2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level announcement effect when it is decided not to execute the first set suggestion effect and the display result is "big win". In the execution/non-execution determination table 2 of the expectation level announcement performance, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement performance is executed is assigned to each of the big win variation patterns. The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation level announcement performance at a rate of 30% and executes it at a rate of 70% when the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds). to decide. In addition, when the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 10%, and to execute it at a rate of 90%. do.

Here, in the example of FIGS. 9 (H1) and (H2) where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, when the variation pattern of "normal reach" is selected, the expectation level notice effect is not executed. 9 (I1) and (I2) in which it was decided (“no execution” is 100%), but it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the “normal reach” variation pattern was selected. In this case, there is a possibility of deciding to execute the expectation level announcement effect ("executed" is 20% for "normal reach lost" and 70% for "normal reach big hit").

Also, in the example of FIGS. 9 (H1) and (H2) where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation level announcement effect when the "super reach" variation pattern is selected (" 40% in "super reach out", 80% in "super reach big hit"), in the example of FIG. When the variation pattern is selected, the ratio of execution of the expectation degree announcement effect is higher (60% for "super reach lost" and 90% for "super reach big hit"). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation degree announcement effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. .

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation degree announcement effect (YES in step S16TM2130), the display result to stop display in the above-described second mini-slot variable display and the second change Whether or not to execute an effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6(J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the establishment combination of the expectation level advance notice effect, which is used when the first set suggestion effect is not executed. (step S16TM2150) and proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7(L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the established combination determination table 2 of the expectation level advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect, more specifically, the expectation level As a winning combination (hereinafter the same) of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the notice effect, "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", Any one of "cherry (freeze)", "7 matching", and "7 matching (freeze)" can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed) case), the successful combination in the expectation degree announcement effect is “lost” at a rate of 100%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is " CHANCE"), the winning role in the expectation level notice effect is "lost" at a rate of 5%, "suica" at a rate of 15%, and "suica (via replay)" at a rate of 50%. , 2% of the time it will be "cherry", 18% of the time it will be "cherry (via replay)", and 10% of the time it will be "cherry (freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "hot heat" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is 10% of the time, 15% of the time, “Watermelon (via replay)”, and 10% of the time, “Watermelon”. 38% of the time it is "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 27% of the time it is "Cherry (Freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " FEVER"), the successful combination in the expectation level announcement effect is "7 matching" at a rate of 30% and "7 matching (Freeze)" at a rate of 70%.

Note that in the present embodiment, the first mini-slot in the expectation level notice effect is determined depending on whether it is determined to execute the first set suggestion effect or when it is determined not to execute the first set suggestion effect. An example has been shown in which the winning combination of the variable display (that is, the winning combination other than "Bell") is determined based on different tables, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation degree announcement rendering (that is, the winning combination other than "Bell") is common between the case where it is determined and the case where it is determined not to execute the first set suggestion effect. may be determined based on a table of That is, while determining whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at different ratios in steps S16TM2020 and S16TM2120 (based on the execution/non-execution determination table for different expectation level announcement effects), the common winning combination is determined in steps S16TM2050 and S16TM2150. Based on the determination table, it is also possible to determine the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation degree announcement effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state (normal state), each time the variation display is executed, the first The mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and the established hand becomes "Bell" or "Loss". Then, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) is completed, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed during the variable display (expectation degree announcement effect is executed case) and (ii) a case where the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (a case where the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation degree announcement effect is executed), the winning hand determined based on the winning hand determination table is established. After that, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is performed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a symbol that does not contain characters (“no display”) or (b) a character symbol (“CHANCE”, “hot heat”) , “FEVER”) stops. (b) When the character patterns (“CHANCE”, “Gekiatsu”, “FEVER”) are stopped, a second change effect is executed in which a character icon based on the character pattern is added to the active display. Become.

Thus, in the above-described embodiment, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) a symbol not containing characters (“no display”) stops, that is, the second Even if the change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before the change effect, and the effect configuration is adopted so that the established hand always becomes "lost". . Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the pattern that does not contain characters ("no display") stops (when the second change effect is not executed) In addition, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that may have the possibility of establishing a winning hand other than "lost".

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) symbols that do not contain characters (“no display”) stop (when the second variation effect is not executed), (i) The first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (in the 3-reel system), the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in the 1-reel system) is displayed. A second minislot variable display (first time) may be performed.

Also, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (b) character symbols (“CHANCE”, “Gekiatsu”, and “FEVER”) may always be stopped. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1, the second variation effect may be executed without fail. When such an effect structure is adopted, (i) the first variable display of mini-slots (second time) executed before the second variable display of mini-slots (second time) is "lost". You can make it so that it does not.

Next, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is 25×n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 executes a second setting suggestion effect described later. Whether or not is determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the second setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-7(M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is not 25×n (where n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state, the second setting suggestion effect can be executed as the effect of suggesting the currently set setting value. In this second setting suggestion effect, the variation count display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in purple at the timing when the variable display of the special symbols is started. It is a production that changes the mode. Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is ended, and the change count display 16TM040 displayed in the purple mode in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the normal mode. back to

In FIG. 9-7 (M), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90% and decides to execute it at a rate of 10%. Further, when the set value is "2", it is determined not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88% and to execute it at a rate of 12%. Further, when the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and to execute it at a rate of 14%. Further, when the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84% and to execute it at a rate of 16%. Further, when the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and to execute it at a rate of 18%. Further, when the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute it at a rate of 20%.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state, the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, and the expectation level notice effect are executed. Although an example is shown, it is not limited to such a form, and when the game state is either a low probability high base state, a high probability high base state, or a high probability low base state, the mini on the image display device 5 The slot 16TM030 may be displayed to execute any one of the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, or the degree of expectation announcement effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state, the image display device 5 displays the change number display 16TM040 to execute the second setting suggestion effect. Regardless of the form, when the game state is any of the low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, or high-probability-low base state, the image display device 5 displays the number of fluctuations 16TM040, and the second A setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, after determining whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed in step S16TM2000, it is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120 whether or not the expectation degree announcement effect is to be executed, and further in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. We have decided the establishment role of the expectation notice production. When determining the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. , in this embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time).

In addition, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation degree announcement effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect. When the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), and normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is determined at a rate of 100% that "expectation degree notice effect is not executed". On the other hand, when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), it is determined that "execute the expectation level announcement effect" at a rate of 40%, and in the case of super reach jackpot (120 seconds) decides to "execute the expectation level announcement effect" at a rate of 80%.

Thus, regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the first setting suggestion effect can be executed, and regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 , [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] mini-slot symbols can be stopped and displayed. Further, when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestive effect and the expectation level notice effect can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 can be executed. , and 5R1 stop displaying combinations of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell]. Combinations of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.) can be stopped and displayed. According to such a configuration, in the mini-slot 16TM030, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, and also to execute the expectation level announcement effect that suggests the level of expectation that the display result will be a "big hit". As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), every time the first setting suggestion effect with different execution ratios according to the setting value is executed, the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is counted by the player himself/herself. , the player himself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect [execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect = (the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect / the number of times of fluctuation) x 100], and the calculated first setting suggestion The player can guess the set value by determining which set value of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the execution ratio of the effect approximates.

Hypothetically, a configuration is adopted in which the determination of whether or not to execute the anticipation performance is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the first setting suggestion performance is to be performed, and the expectation level prediction performance is performed with priority over the first setting suggestion performance. In this case, the execution lottery for the first set suggestion effect is not performed due to the fact that the expectation level notice effect is decided to be executed and the variable time, or the lottery for the first set suggestion effect is won. However, there may be a case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed due to the expectation level advance notice effect being given priority. As a result, the degree of divergence between the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual setting value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for guessing the setting value is lowered, and there is a possibility that the player will not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in steps S16TM2000 and S16TM2020 in FIG. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed over the expectation degree announcement effect.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, FIG. 9-8 to FIG. 9 with regard to specific examples when it is decided to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree announcement effect. -10 is used for explanation. FIG. 9-8 is a time chart when executing the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level announcement effect, and FIG. 9-9 and FIG. -10 shows an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level notice effect are executed. It is an explanatory diagram.

9-8 to 9-10, when the CPU 103 performs the first start winning determination process (S101A), the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting win becomes "big hit". This is an example when it is determined (when designated by a design designation command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to be red in step S16TM1010 in the change effect determination process at the time of start winning, and changes the active display in step S16TM1020. This is an example of a case where the pattern is determined to be the variation pattern 022 and the execution of the first variation effect of the success mode is determined.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the variation display is a "big hit" at the start of variation (designated by a display result designation command), and sets the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display to "super reach jackpot". (120 seconds)" (specified by the variation pattern command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first setting suggesting effect in step S16TM2000 in the effect determination process at the time of start of variation, and executes the expectation degree announcement effect in step S16TM2020. In step S16TM2040, it is decided to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be "super heat", and in step S16TM2050, it is decided to execute the second change effect, and in step S16TM2050, the degree of expectation notice effect is decided. This is an example in the case where it is decided to set the established hand to be "Cherry (Freeze)" and to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state, the display of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) Based on the fact that the result is "lost", the effect control CPU 120 determines when the variable display is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decoration patterns ("247" in this example) is continuously displayed. Also, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing", the small symbol display area 5l of the image display device 5 and the small symbol display area 5c and the small pattern display area 5r, the combination of small patterns ("247" in this example) when the variable display is stopped is continuously displayed. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 to display four first reserved displays 16TM001 in response to the fact that the number of first reserved memories is four.

When in the low probability low base state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), in the image display device 5, the number of times the variable display is performed during the period of the low probability low base state (normal state) 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, after moving to the low probability low base state, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 124 times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), "124" etc. is displayed in a normal mode (white mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the mini- In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([Replay], [Replay], [Bell] in this example) when the variable display is fixed and stopped is continuously displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, corresponding to the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3. Then, three first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Based on the decision to execute the second setting suggestion effect in S16TM2070, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, after moving to the low probability low base state, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), "125" etc. is displayed in purple. The player understands that the setting has been suggested by the fact that the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 has changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8), the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000. The symbol variable display (first mini-slot variable display) is started. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8), the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the change count display 16TM040 (characters such as "125") displayed in purple mode is returned to normal mode (white mode). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is continued, and in the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the image display device 5, the mini-slot patterns are variable. continue to display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8 timing of T4), in step S16TM1020 it is determined that the change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 022, and based on the fact that it is decided to execute the first change effect of the success mode, success The first change effect of the aspect is executed. In this example, a character 16TM050 appears and an effect is executed in which a ball is thrown toward the active display 16TM003. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 hits the active display 16TM003, the player can expect that the mode of the active display 16TM003 will change.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. , Continues variable display of mini-slot symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8 timing of T5), according to the execution of the first change effect of the success mode, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, the white round display to the red round display). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Bell] [ [Bell] [Bell]) is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8 timing of T6), based on the fact that it has been decided in step S16TM2050 that the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect is to be "cherry (freeze)", the expectation level announcement effect is executed, and the image display device In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of 5, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols in the freeze state is started. In this example, when the freeze-mode variable display is executed, a darkened image 16TM100 is displayed as a cover image covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbols. In the difficult state, variable display (scroll display or update display) of mini-slot symbols from bottom to top is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In the present embodiment, by displaying the darkened image 16TM100 covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 in order to reduce the visibility of the mini-slot symbols, the mini-slot image 16TM100 having a lower display priority than the darkened image 16TM100 is displayed. Although the slot pattern is difficult to see, it is slightly visible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%). A mini-slot symbol with a low display priority (an image whose display layer is lower and which can be seen behind the darkened image 16TM100 from the viewpoint of the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is 0). %).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9 -8), the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 is determined based on the fact that it is decided in step S16TM2050 that the establishment hand of the expectation degree announcement effect is to be "cherry (freeze)". , 5C1 and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) when the winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 puts "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the ready-to-reach state in the variation pattern should be established. is displayed in a stationary state, and characters "READY!!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decoration pattern is stopped, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display with the establishment of the ready-to-win state as a trigger. . That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the three-reel mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 to the one-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. In the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of one reel, any one of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols (“no display”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, “FEVER”) can be displayed as a display result. When the result is a pattern ("CHANCE", "rapid heat", "FEVER") including the notice character, the icon of the notice character as the display result is added to the active display based on the display result. A second change effect is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of mini-slot symbols in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the effect control CPU 120 decides in step S16TM2040 to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be "rapid heat", that is, Based on the fact that the notice character of the expectation degree notice performance is determined to be "rapid heat", the symbol including the notice character of "rapid heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (timing of T9 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (11), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2040 to execute the second change effect (stop display of the symbol including the notice character). Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing of T10 in FIG. 9-8). In this example, when the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the "hot" symbol) stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is displayed from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. It moves to the active display area 16TM013, and an effect acting on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the "hot heat" symbol) popped out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the effect image is displayed. It suggests to the player that the aspect of the active display 16TM003 will change. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (12), a battle effect is executed according to the variation pattern of super reach. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes a character icon (in this example, a character icon of "rapid heat") based on the mini-slot symbol displayed stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 on the active display 16TM003. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. That is, a character icon indicating the same character as the notice character ("rapid heat" in this example) resulting from the display is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 Then, a combination of mini-slot symbols ([Cherry] [Cherry] [Cherry] in this example) in which the winning hand is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed (Fig. 9-9 (8)), and then the mini-slot symbols are displayed. In the area 5LCR1, a mini-slot symbol (“Geki-netsu” in this example) as the notice character of the expectation level notice effect is stop-displayed (FIG. 9-10 (10)), and then stopped in the mini-slot-symbol display area 5LCR1. A second change effect is executed to add to the active display 16TM003 a character icon indicating the same characters as the characters of the displayed mini-slot symbol ("rapid heat" in this example) (FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12). )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed according to the combination of the mini-slot symbols stop-displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the 2-change effect can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, the first setting suggestion effect is ended before the battle effect executed according to the variation pattern of super reach is started. I'm trying That is, before the battle effect is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [bell][ Bell] [Bell]) is hidden. Thus, by executing the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value in the first half of the variable display (before the ready-to-reach state is established), that is, before the display result of the variable display is suggested, the first setting is performed. It is possible to increase interest in suggestive production. In addition, in the second half of the variable display (after the ready-to-win state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the variable display is indicated (after the battle effect that informs whether the display result will be a "big hit" is started) In this case, since the first setting suggestion effect has already ended, it is possible to draw attention to the display result of the variable display (the result of the battle effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect, the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) in which the established hand is "lost", stops. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), based on the fact that it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 are established. A combination of mini-slot symbols with a winning combination of "Bell" (in this example, [Bell] [Bell] [Bell]) is stopped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the mini-slot symbol display on the image display device 5 is based on the fact that it is decided to execute the expectation degree announcement effect and that the established hand is decided to be "Cherry". In areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) in which the winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped. In this way, any one of a plurality of types of winning hands can be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot 16TM030. Interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) and (3), in the lower left area of the screen of the image display device 5 different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5), the number of fluctuations is displayed. A second setting suggestion effect is executed to change 16TM040 from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is in the range of 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6). As shown in 9-7 (M), the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is in the range of 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6), so both effects are executed the same number of times. If it is assumed that the second setting suggestion effect is performed, it is easier to guess the set value than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6). Then, the set value corresponding to the effect execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the gaming machine. In addition, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6), and the former A set value corresponding to the closest effect execution ratio is guessed as a set value of the game machine. When such an estimation is made, the setting value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is higher than the setting value estimated based on the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. There is a high possibility that it is the setting value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery for the first setting suggestion effect is performed for each variation display, and the execution lottery for the second setting suggestion effect is performed for each 25 times of variation display. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times within the same fluctuation display count (within the same time) than the second setting suggestion effect, which is useful for estimating the setting value. . In this way, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the setting value suggested by the effect is the setting value of the gaming machine at different rates, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, small pattern variable display is executed. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9, in the special effect area 16TM035 (bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5), the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and in the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first 2 Setting suggestion production is executed. In this way, in the upper part of the screen, the variable display of the small symbols is executed as an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, while in the lower part of the screen, the setting suggestion effect (the first setting suggestion effect, the second By executing the setting suggesting effect), one of the effects does not reduce the visibility of the other effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3(A), as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, there are a plurality of display modes such as a normal mode, a blue mode, and a red mode ( display color). Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), when the character 16TM050 appears and the action effect of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed, the display mode (display) of the active display 16TM003 color) is changed from a normal mode (white circular display) to a red mode (red circular display). In addition, the second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of variation, and based on the character symbol that is the display result, the icon of the character indicated by the character symbol is displayed. A second change effect added to the active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect that changes the display color of the active display according to the effect effect executed in a region different from the region where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the region where the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( By providing a plurality of types of change effects called a second change effect that changes the display shape of the active display according to the action effect based on the notice character displayed in the special effect area 16TM035), the interest when changing the active display is provided. can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), when the second change effect is executed, the mini-slot symbols stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 ("hot heat" in this example). , jumps out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and hits the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013. Specifically, after an effect image showing that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, “hot”) jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the mini-slot symbol display area is displayed. A character icon showing the same character as the character of the mini-slot symbol stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 are associated with each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the winning combination of the expectation degree announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is "miss", "suika , "cherry", and "7 matching". Then, according to the determined winning combination, the selection ratio of which display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", "CHANCE", "great heat", or "FEVER". different. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is one of the character symbols "CHANCE", "Gekiatsu", and "FEVER", the aspect of the character symbol; It matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, it is determined which mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003 will be in accordance with the winning hand of the expectation degree announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. the proportions are different. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 are associated with each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of tally result of winning hand)
In this embodiment, during the demo display, the "volume adjustment" icon for adjusting the volume during the game, the "light amount adjustment" icon for adjusting the light amount during the game, the low probability low base state (normal state ) and the number of wins of each winning combination in the mini-slot 16TM030, a menu screen including a "mini reel information" icon, etc. is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, it is possible to select each icon of "volume control", "light amount control", and "mini reel information".

FIGS. 9-11 are displayed on the full screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of mini-reel information;

As shown in FIGS. 9-11, the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the text "mini-reel information". In addition, in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, the total number of variable display (variable display of special symbols) executed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) and the winning number of each winning combination in the mini-slot 16TM030 are displayed. , a selected tab 16TM210 displaying the characters "today", and a next selection tab 16TM220 displaying the characters "previous day" are displayed. Further, on the right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210 to prompt the user to operate the stick controller 31A. Further, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters "return".

In the mini reel information 16TM200, at the top, the character "number of rotations" is displayed as an item indicating the number of times of variable display, and correspondingly, the cumulative total of variable displays executed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) The number of times "XXXX times" is displayed. In the second row, the character "Bell" is displayed as an item indicating the bell of the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times "Bell" has been achieved as the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display is displayed as "AAAA". times”, and the probability of winning “Bell” “(1/aaaa.a)” [= Cumulative number of times “Bell” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the third row, characters "watermelon" are displayed as an item indicating watermelon as the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times "watermelon" has been achieved as the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display is displayed as "BBBB." times”, and the probability of winning “(1/bbbb.b)” of “Watermelon” [= Cumulative number of times “Watermelon” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability low base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the fourth row, the word "cherry" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination "cherry". times”, and the winning probability of “Cherry” “(1/cccc.c)” [= Cumulative number of times “Cherry” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the fifth row, the character "777" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination of 7 matches. “DDDD times” and “7 matching” winning probability “(1/dddd.d)” [= Total number of times “7 matching” was established / Variable display executed in low probability low base state (normal state) Total count] is displayed.

In addition, the total number of times (DDDD times) that "7 matching" has been won is the combination of mini-slot symbols that become "7 matching" in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of mini-slot 16TM030 (in this example, .

Also, each total number of times (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed with a maximum of four digits, and the count stops at "9999 times". Also, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed with a maximum of five digits including the first decimal place, and the count stops at "1/9999.9". For each winning combination, when the number of times of winning is one or more, the winning probability is displayed, and when the number of times of winning is 0, the probability of winning is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 stores history information (such as the above-described total number of times) related to the mini reel information, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the mini reel information as an image based on the stored history information. It can be displayed on the display device 5 . Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before last" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even when the power is turned off.

The mini-reel information is defaulted to the mini-reel information of "today", characters of "today" are displayed on the selected tab 16TM210, and characters of "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the user to operate the stick controller 31A. Each time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "the day before" to "the day before", and the selected tab 16TM210 is displayed. The text is switched from "the day before" to "the day before", and the text of the next selection tab 16TM220 is switched from "the day before" to "today". When the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A is operated while the mini-reel information of "two days ago" is selected, the mini-reel information of "today" is selected again, and the characters of the selected tab 16TM210 are displayed. is changed to "today", and the characters of the next selection tab 16TM220 are changed to "the previous day".

When the gaming machine is powered on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to, and if the date of the previous power-on is different from the date of the current power-on, the history information of "previous day" is changed to " After storing (overwriting history information) in the storage area corresponding to "two days ago", store the history information of "today" in the storage area corresponding to "the day before" (overwriting history information) and update the data . As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business on "today", based on the updated history information of "the day before" and "the day before" stored in the backup storage area, "the day before" and "the day before" Everyday” mini reel information can be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters "Return". When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM280 is being displayed, the display of the mini-reel information ends and the menu screen returns.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, the backed up "today", " The image display device 5 displays the mini-reel information based on the history information of "the day before" and "the day before the day before". Then, in the mini-reel information 16TM200, it is the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, and is the winning probability of "Bell" "(1/aaaa.a)" [= Cumulative number of times "Bell" has been established / low probability low base Cumulative number of variable display executed in the state (normal state)] is displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the player counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the player himself/herself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect, and the calculated first setting suggestion effect is calculated. The setting value can be estimated by determining which setting value of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each known setting value the execution ratio approximates. However, when the player himself counts the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect, the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect may be erroneously counted. In this embodiment, during the demo display, the player can confirm the execution probability of the first setting suggestive effect (the winning probability of "Bell") in the mini-reel information by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Since it is possible, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestive effect is erroneously counted, the correct execution probability of the first set suggestive effect can be easily grasped.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect were effects suggesting the currently set setting value, but the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect , It can be said that it is a production that suggests that the setting has been changed. For example, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is close to the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is close to the setting value. 2, it is difficult for the player to estimate the actual set value when the execution rate (well-known execution rate) of the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to 2 is approximate. However, in such a situation, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the mini-reel information of “the day before” and “the day before the day before” are both the execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the set value 1 (well-known execution ratio), the player can at least guess that there is a high possibility that the set value has been changed. In other words, it can be inferred that the set value of "the day before" and "the day before last" is set to 1, and since there is a high possibility that the set value of "today" has been changed, the current set value is at least a set value of 2 or more.

Note that the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects that are executed at different rates depending on whether or not the setting value is changed on the day. For example, if the set value is changed on the day, the setting suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the set value is not changed on the day.

Also, the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects that are executed at different rates according to the set value. For example, an effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Also, the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects in which the effect mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while when the set value is 3 or more. Alternatively, the display color of the setting suggestion rendering may be determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of "lost" < "watermelon" < "cherry" < "7 matching". Although an example has been shown, it is not limited to such a form, and the degree of expectation of a specific jackpot type may be varied according to the established hand. For example, the degree of expectation that the type of jackpot will be a variable probability jackpot differs depending on the established combination, and the degree of expectation may be increased in the order of "lost"<"watermelon"<"cherry"<"7 sets".

(3) In the above-described embodiment, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "lost" is executed. However, not limited to this, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "lost" is executed. (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself may not be performed.

When such an effect configuration is adopted, (ii) when the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (a) When it is decided to execute the expectation level announcement effect, the first mini-slot variable display related to the expectation level announcement effect is executed, and the establishment role (including "loss") other than "Bell" is selected as the establishment role. After establishment, the second mini-slot variable display relating to the expectation level advance notice effect is executed. On the other hand, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (ii) if the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed, (b) it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect. Sometimes, neither the first mini-slot variable display nor the second mini-slot variable display will be performed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. An example has been shown in which the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5, but the mini-reel information may be displayed during a period other than the demonstration display. For example, during the period of the jackpot game state including the fanfare period and the ending period, or during the period of the variable display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect. In addition, the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified without requiring an operation. The execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed when the period ends.

(5) In the above embodiment, the example in which the mini-reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 is shown. Also good. For example, in a game machine equipped with a sub-image display device that displays various effect images different from the image display device 5, mini-reel information is displayed on the sub-image display device during demo display, during a jackpot game state, or during variable display. You can

(6) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the second change effect is the effect of changing the display mode of the active display. It may be an effect that changes the display mode. For example, according to the display result (character pattern) of the second mini-slot variable display, a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display that has not been executed (the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed. A second change effect may be executed in which a character icon based on the display result of the mini-slot variable display is added to the pending display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. In this way, the display result suggested by the second mini-slot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display that is being executed, and may be the display result of the variable display that is not being executed. Further, the target of the corresponding information to be changed by the second change effect is not limited to the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display being executed (active display), but also the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display not being executed (holding display). may be

(7) In the above embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels) is performed twice (the first winning combination is "Bell" or "Loss"). , and the second winning hand is other than "Bell"), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mini-slot variable display may be performed three times or more. For example, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display is executed twice, and the expectation level based on the decision to execute the expectation level announcement effect The first mini-slot variable display relating to the advance notice effect may be performed twice, and then the second mini-slot variable display relating to the degree of expectation notice effect may be executed. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed a total of four times, after the first winning hand is set to "miss", the second winning hand is set to "Bell" (first setting suggestion effect), and the third time is performed. It is possible to set the winning hand of the fourth time to be "cherry" after the winning hand of the fourth time is set to "watermelon".

(8) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the second mini-slot variable display is executed only once based on the decision to execute the expectation degree announcement effect. 2 minislot variable display may be performed more than once. For example, after the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is "CHANCE", the display result of the second mini-slot variable display may be "rapid heat". In this way, when the second mini-slot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that a display result with a high degree of expectation is not followed by a display result with a low degree of expectation, The ebb and flow of notice characters shall be restricted.

In addition, the second change effect may be executed multiple times in response to the fact that the second mini-slot variable display is executed multiple times. For example, based on the display result of the first variable mini-slot display being "CHANCE", the character icon of "CHANCE" is displayed superimposed on the active display, and then the display result of the second variable mini-slot display. becomes "extreme heat", the character icon "extreme heat" may be superimposed on the active display instead of the character icon "CHANCE". In this way, when the second change effect is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so as not to change from a display mode with high expectations to a display mode with low expectations, and the active display is performed. It shall limit the downfall of the display mode.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode was exemplified as a special mode of variable display of the mini-slot symbols. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the above-described freeze mode, a mode in which the speed at which mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (the speed of scrolling) is extremely faster or slower than in the normal mode may be provided. A mode may be provided in which the mini-slot symbols to be played are enlarged (for example, 200% of the normal mode). Furthermore, the ratio of winning hands may differ according to the type of special mode. For example, in the second special mode (freeze mode) than in the first special mode (the mode in which the mini-slot symbols are enlarged), the winning hand for the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is "cherry" or "7 matching". You may make it the ratio which becomes high.

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display times) of mini-slot symbols may be provided. For example, as variable display patterns of mini-slot symbols, a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbols, the winning hand may be determined at different ratios. For example, in the case of a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of winning wins "Cherry" or "7 matching" is higher than in the case of a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 3.5 seconds. may be higher.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, at the timing when the combination of mini-slot symbols is stop-displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (when the winning hand is established), the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a manner corresponding to the winning hand. Effect images may be displayed in the display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. For example, when "Replay" is established as a successful role, a blue effect image is displayed, and when "Bell" is established as a successful role, a yellow effect image is displayed, and "Watermelon" is established as a successful role. , a green effect image is displayed, and if "cherry" is established as a winning hand, a red effect image is displayed, and if "7 matching" is established as a winning hand, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed. good.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 stop and display "7 matching" as a winning combination to notify that the big win is confirmed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , "BAR COMPLETE" may be stop-displayed as a winning combination to notify that the big win is confirmed. Stopping display of "all BARs" as an established combination means stopping display of the combination of [BAR][BAR][BAR] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. Further, it may be configured such that when "7 matching" is established, the probability variable big win is decided, and when "BAR matching" is established, the normal big win is decided.

(13) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbols does not depend on whether or not the variable display of the special symbols is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed), and Although an example of information that can be displayed regardless of the number of reserved memories has been shown, the mini-slot 16TM030 may be hidden during a predetermined period without being limited to such a form. For example, the mini-slot 16TM030 may be hidden during the period in which the super reach effect is being executed.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is not established multiple times during one variable display of special symbols, except for "lost". It is not limited to such a form, and during one time of variable display of the special symbol, the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) that is not "lost" may be established a plurality of times. In the case of adopting such a configuration, if all the number of times the winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established is included in the total number of times, [how many times of the n variation It becomes extremely difficult to grasp the most important information in estimating the set value, such as whether the winning hand [Bell] was established corresponding to It may decrease and the player may not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, even if the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established a plurality of times during a single variable display of special symbols, the same winning combination is displayed during this variable display. The cumulative number of times is counted, with the number of times that the condition is established as 1 time. For example, even if the winning combination of "Bell" is established three times during the variable display of one special symbol, the number of times that the winning combination of "Bell" is established during this variable display is regarded as one, and the mini reel is used. 1 is added to the total number of times "Bell" of the information 16TM200 has been won.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. (e.g., set values such as 5, 6, etc., which are particularly advantageous for the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from that for other set values. For example, if the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestion mode (eg purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. When the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, gold mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. Regarding whether or not to use the first setting suggestion mode, a lottery is performed at a rate of once in 25 times as described above. A separate lottery may be conducted at a rate of once every time. Then, when it is determined to be the second setting suggestion mode, regardless of whether or not it is determined to be the first setting suggestion mode, the change number display 16TM040 is changed to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, the gold mode ).

(16) In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is set in common. Not limited to this, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may differ according to the variation pattern (variation time). For example, a variation pattern with a long variation time is better than a variation pattern with a short variation time. , the first setting suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate.

(17) In the above embodiment, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is executed at the bottom center of the screen, and the display result suggests the set value. The set value may be suggested by another effect executed in response to the variable display of the pattern. For example, an effect may be executed in which one of a plurality of types of characters appears in response to the variable display of the mini-slot symbols, and the set value may be suggested by the type of the character that has appeared.

Incidentally, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the mini-slot symbols may be performed in an area different from the central lower portion of the screen. For example, it may be executed in a region that is the right end or left end of the screen and does not overlap (does not overlap) the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5 is used. may be performed.

(18) In the above embodiment, the effects that affect the pending display and the effects that affect the active display are displayed in the lower center portion of the screen (see FIG. 9-10 (11)) or the lower right portion (FIG. 9-9 (5)). ), but these renditions may be performed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in a region that is the right end or left end of the screen and does not overlap (does not overlap) the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5 is used. may be performed.

(19) In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation level announcement effect by the variable display of the mini-slot symbols are shown as an example in which the performance is performed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), but not limited to this, It may be executed in a high-probability-high base state or a high-probability-low base state (KT control that tends to result in a smaller hit than in a normal state).

In such an effect configuration, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect (percentage of “bell” as the established hand) is number of times) to (percentage of the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect in the game state (the number of times the established hand is "Bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot pattern)]. When the variable display of the mini-slot pattern is executed, [(the number of times that the mini-slot pattern variable display executed in the high-probability-high base state has become a "bell") ÷ (high-probability-high base The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated, and the setting value is suggested by the calculated value.In addition, the high probability low base state (KT state ), when variable display of mini-slot symbols is performed, [(Number of times the winning hand is “Bell” in variable display of mini-slot symbols performed in the high-probability-low base state (KT state)) ÷ (The number of variable display times of decorative symbols (special symbols) executed in the high-probability-low base state (KT state))], the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated, and the calculated value suggests the setting value.

The above [description of the characteristic part 16TM] shows an example of the configuration relating to the following means A1 to A10 and an example of the configuration relating to the following means B1 to B10.

Here, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player can be set. A game machine has been proposed that displays a character image corresponding to the number of characters. As for a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), there is room for improving the entertainment of the presentation. The configuration related to means A1 to means A10 shown below and the configuration related to means B1 to means B10 shown below are made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and one of a plurality of setting values To improve the interest of performance related to a game machine which can be set to a value.

The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) of means A1 is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The display means provides a special display corresponding to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of control of the advantageous state (a winning hand is "Bell"). "Watermelon", "Cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 matching", "No display", "CHANCE", "Extreme heat", or "FEVER" symbols) can be displayed,
When the variable display period is a predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (if the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), or normal reach big hit (30 seconds), It is possible to stop display the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell"), and when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific display can be displayed after the special display is displayed. (If the variation pattern (variation time) is Super Reach Lost (120 seconds) or Super Reach Big Hit (120 seconds), after stopping the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell", the winning hand is " A combination of mini-slot symbols of "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 matching" is stopped and displayed, and symbols of "no display", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", or "FEVER" are stopped and displayed. is possible).
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display the special display with priority over the specific display, it is possible to improve interest in setting suggestions.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the effect control means displays the special display at a different rate according to the set value. (Step S16TM2000) determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display, and as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the first setting The execution ratio of the suggestion production is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to guess the set value when the variable display is performed.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the effect control means displays the special display at a different rate according to the set value. After making this determination, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is decided whether or not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A3,
The display means (the effect control CPU 120, the image display device 5) displays the special display (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning combination is "Bell") when the specific effect (battle effect in Super Reach) is executed. It is characterized by being hidden.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (production control CPU 120, image display device 5) variably displays information (mini-slot design variable display), and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell") or the specific display (the winning hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that result in 7 matching”, or a character symbol of “CHANCE”, “Fever”, or “FEVER”), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols that makes the winning combination “miss”, or , “no display” pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation executed in the specific area of the display means.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in specific areas (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the aspect of the variable display executed in the specific area becomes a special aspect (freeze aspect), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special aspect (freeze aspect) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbols perform the variable display of the freeze mode, the established hand is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 matching (freeze)", and "cherry" Since the above winning combination (“cherry” or “7 matching”) is confirmed, the degree of expectation that the mini-slot symbols will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a normal mode.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means by changing the variable display mode to a special mode.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6,
There are multiple types of specific indications ("watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are available as established roles, and "no indication", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" are available as display results). ),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs according to the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of “7 matching”)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in the type of specific display.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7,
a storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (accumulated number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell" has been stopped and displayed);
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information about the display history (the history display means (image display device 5 for displaying mini-reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying winning probability of "bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information about the display history of the special display in order to guess the set value.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8,
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) that suggests a set value in a special area (bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5),
The rate at which the special display is displayed differs from the rate at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is performed by drawing lots for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times The execution lottery is performed for each fluctuation display),
The ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the gaming machine differs from the ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the gaming machine (Fig. 9-6 As shown in (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M) In addition, since the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6), the actual effect execution ratio between the first set suggestion effect and the second set suggestion effect The ratio of matching the setting value estimated based on the game machine setting value is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested setting value to the setting value of the gaming machine differs depending on whether the special display is a special display or not. You can draw attention to what is suggested.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A9,
The variable display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing variable display of the first decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) in the first regions (decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the center of the screen). , the variable display (variable display of small patterns) of the second decoration identification information whose visibility is lower than that of the first decoration identification information can be executed in the second regions (small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r in the upper right part of the screen). can be,
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of displaying at least one of the special display and the specific display in the first area (mini-slot patterns are displayed in the mini-reel design display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 at the bottom center of the screen). combination is displayed), and the display of the special display and the specific display in the second area is restricted (mini-slot symbols are not displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the visibility of the variable display of the second decoration identification information in the second area.

The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) of means B1 is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The display means provides a special display corresponding to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of control of the advantageous state (a winning hand is "Bell"). "Watermelon", "Cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols of "7 matching", symbols of "No display", "CHANCE", "Extreme heat", or "FEVER") can be displayed in a specific area. ,
Corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 where the specific display is displayed in the specific area (as shown in FIG. 9-9(8), a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Cherry" is displayed. After the stop display, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the character pattern of "hot heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1. change effect (as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), a character icon indicating the same character as the mini-slot pattern character (“hot heat”) is added to the active display 16TM030) and effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion, a change effect can be executed in response to the specific display being displayed in the specific area. can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
There are multiple types of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) as modes of the corresponding display (active display),
The game machine is characterized in that the effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (first change effect) for changing the special mode of the corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the display corresponding to the special mode will change.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute an effect acting on a corresponding display (active display) to be subjected to the change effect as the change effect (second change effect) (FIGS. 9-10). As shown in (11) and (12), an effect indicating that the mini-slot symbol ("Geki-netsu") stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003. After the image is displayed, a character icon showing the same character as the character ("Geki-netsu") of the mini-slot symbol displayed stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the changing presentation.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine of means B1 to means B3,
There are a plurality of types of the specific display ("missing", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 matching" are available as the establishment combination of the first variable display of the mini-slot, and " No display”, “CHANCE”, “hot”, “FEVER”),
Depending on the type of the specific display, the aspect of the corresponding display targeted for the change effect is determined at a different rate (as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the first The winning hand for the variable display of the mini-slots of 1 is determined to be any one of "lost", "watermelon", "cherry", and "seven match", and depending on which winning hand is determined, the second mini-slot is selected. The display result of the variable display is different from the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, and the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is different. Since it matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, it is added to the active display 16TM003 according to which hand is determined to establish the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation level announcement effect. The ratio of which character icon mode will be different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the type of specific display and the mode of corresponding display can be associated with each other, and the entertainment of the presentation can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the effect control means displays the special display at a different rate according to the set value. After making this determination, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is decided whether or not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (production control CPU 120, image display device 5) variably displays information (mini-slot design variable display), and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell") or the specific display (the winning hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that result in 7 matching”, or a character symbol of “CHANCE”, “Fever”, or “FEVER”), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols that makes the winning hand “miss”, or , “no display” pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation executed in the specific area of the display means.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in specific areas (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the aspect of the variable display executed in the specific area becomes a special aspect (freeze aspect), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special aspect (freeze aspect) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbols perform the variable display of the freeze mode, the established hand is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 matching (freeze)", and "cherry" Since the above winning combination (“cherry” or “7 matching”) is confirmed, the degree of expectation that the mini-slot symbols will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a normal mode.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means by changing the variable display mode to a special mode.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7,
There are multiple types of specific indications ("watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are available as established roles, and "no indication", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" are available as display results). ),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of “7 matching”)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in the type of specific display.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8,
a storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (accumulated number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell" has been stopped and displayed);
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information about the display history (the history display means (image display device 5 for displaying mini-reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying winning probability of "bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information about the display history of the special display in order to guess the set value.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B9,
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) that suggests a set value in a special area (bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5),
The rate at which the special display is displayed differs from the rate at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is performed by drawing lots for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times The execution lottery is performed for each fluctuation display),
The ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the gaming machine differs from the ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the gaming machine (Fig. 9-6 As shown in (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas as shown in FIG. 9-7 (M) In addition, since the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6), the actual effect execution ratio between the first set suggestion effect and the second set suggestion effect The ratio of matching the setting value estimated based on the game machine setting value is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested setting value to the setting value of the gaming machine differs depending on whether the special display is a special display or not. You can draw attention to what is suggested.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 27TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 27TM will be described. The gaming machine shown in the above [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM], that is, the gaming machine in which the set value can be changed may include the following characteristic portion 27TM.

Specifically, in the gaming machine provided with the characteristic portion 27TM, the effect image displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbols (the effect image corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols) is reduced. A split effect is executed in which the left part of the effect display area and the right part of the effect display area are displayed in the manner described above (see FIG. 10-1). By this division production, the impression as if the variable display of a plurality of special patterns (or the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns corresponding to each of the variable displays of the plurality of special patterns) is simultaneously executed in parallel is played. can give to anyone. In this [description of characteristic portion 27TM], the description of the configuration similar to that shown in the above-described [description of characteristic portion 16TM] is omitted.

(Screen configuration when executing split effects)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect information displayed on the screen when the split effect is executed in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the area in which the effect information can be displayed (the area of the entire screen) in the image display device 5 is defined as the effect display area 27TM005A.

First small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are provided in the upper left part of the effect display area 27TM005A. A variable display of the first small pattern is executed. A second small pattern display area is provided in the upper right portion of the screen of the effect display area 27TM005A. Indication shall be performed.

That is, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the performance symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols (main performance symbols) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r, variable display of the first small patterns (symbols for sub-effects smaller and less visible than the symbols for main effect) is executed. Also, as the variable display of the performance symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols (main performance symbols) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the second small symbol display area. Then, the variable display of the second small pattern (symbol for sub-effect that is smaller than the pattern for main effect and has low visibility) is executed.

In the lower part of the effect display area 27TM005A, a first reservation display area 27TM011 for displaying a first reservation memory number (first reservation display 27TM010 of 0 to 4) and an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are displayed. An active display area 27TM031 and a second pending display area 27TM021 for displaying a second pending storage number (second pending display 27TM020 of 0 to 4) are provided. With the active display area 27TM031 in the center, the left side as viewed from the player is the first reserved display area 27TM011, and the right side is the second reserved display area 27TM021.

In addition, in the vicinity of the left end of the effect display area 27TM005A and in the center in the vertical direction, there is provided a first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 that displays the first reserved memory number in numbers. A second reserved memory count special display area 27TM025 for displaying the second reserved memory count in numbers is provided in the central portion in the vertical direction. Since the number of objects (first reserved display 27TM010) corresponding to the number of first reserved memories is displayed in the first reserved display area 27TM011, the number of objects displayed in the first reserved display area 27TM011 is larger than the number of reserved memories displayed in the first reserved display area 27TM011. The first reserved memory number displayed in the one reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 is less conspicuous and less visible. In addition, since the number of objects (second reserved display 27TM020) corresponding to the second reserved memory number is displayed in the second reserved display area 27TM021, the second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved display area 27TM021 Also, the second reserved memory count displayed in the second reserved memory count special display area 27TM025 is less conspicuous and less visible.

In the split effect, the number of combinations of decorative patterns (main effect patterns) to be variably displayed and frames surrounding the decorative patterns is increased from one set to two sets, one of which is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. , the other is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. In the first effect image display area 27TM100A, a first effect image 27TM100 and a first effect image frame 27TM110 including a first decoration pattern (first main effect pattern) are displayed. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a second effect image 27TM200 and a second effect image frame 27TM210 including a second decoration pattern (second main effect pattern) are displayed.

Thus, the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A The second effect information including the image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are both effect information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first effect information and the second effect information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the common special symbol). are displayed simultaneously in parallel.

Here, the first effect information (effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A) is to start the variable display of the special symbol. The performance information corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the performance control CPU 120 correspondingly continues even after the division performance is completed during the variation display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Effect display area 27TM005A contains effect information (for example, the first decoration pattern) that can be displayed.

On the other hand, the second effect information (effect information including the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A) also corresponds to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Although it is the effect information corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120, unlike the first effect information, during the fluctuation display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command, the divided effect This is effect information that is no longer displayed (controlled to be non-display) when the is completed.

Also, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are images displayed side by side for a predetermined period (within the period during which the split effect is being executed), and one of them is different from the other during the predetermined period. It may be a mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the first effect image 27TM100 is an image of a notice effect suggesting the display result of the variable display determined in the change start effect determination process (for example, a cut-in image of a cut-in notice effect, which will be described later). ) may be superimposed.

On the other hand, the second effect image 27TM200 is a movie (in this example, movie A (short/long) and movie B (short/long) to be described later) for a predetermined period corresponding to the variation pattern. is an image based on Therefore, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the preview effect image suggesting the display result of the variable display decided in the effect determination process at the start of variation is not superimposed and displayed. An effect image (for example, a cut-in image to be described later) may be displayed.

When the divided effect is executed, (1) a first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed in the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A, and a second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed in the left part of the effect display area 27TM005A. Contrary to (1) when one pattern of effect control is executed, (2) the second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed in the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed in the left part of the effect display area 27TM005A. In some cases, the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, (1) effect control of the first pattern is executed in the divided effect.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines when the special symbols start to fluctuate (for example, determines when the first special symbols start to fluctuate): (1) the right portion of the screen becomes the first effect image display area 27TM100A; is determined to execute the effect control of the first pattern that becomes the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed on the right side of the screen, A second effect image 27TM200 and a second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed on the left side of the screen (see FIG. 10-1).

In addition, the CPU 103 determines when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (for example, determines when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate), (2) the right part of the screen becomes the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and the left part of the screen becomes the first The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed on the left side of the screen based on the decision to execute the effect control of the second pattern for the effect image display area 27TM100A, and the right part of the screen is displayed. , the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed.

When the effect control of the first pattern is executed in the split effect, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen (in the case of FIG. 10-1), The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 including the background image and decoration pattern that are reduced in size compared to before the division effect are arranged so that the left side of the rectangle (the side on the center side of the screen) is closer to the right side of the rectangle (the side on the right side of the screen). ) is displayed short, and the upper side and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed such that the distance between them narrows from the right end (right side of the screen) to the left end (center side of the screen). That is, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are positioned such that the left end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the right end (right side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

In addition, the second effect image 27TM200 including the background image and the decorative pattern that are reduced in size compared to before the division effect, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are arranged on the right side of the rectangle (on the center side of the screen) rather than on the left side of the rectangle (on the left side of the screen). ) are displayed short, and the upper and lower sides of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between them narrows from the left end (left side of the screen) to the right end (center side of the screen). That is, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are positioned such that the right end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the left end (left side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

On the other hand, when the second pattern of effect control is executed in the split effect, the second effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the first effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen (Fig. 10-1 In the opposite case), the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 including the background image and the decorative pattern that are reduced in size before the division effect are arranged on the right side of the rectangle (left side of the screen) rather than the left side of the rectangle (left side of the screen) The center side of the screen) is displayed short, and the upper side and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between them narrows from the left end (left side of the screen) to the right end (center side of the screen). That is, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are positioned such that the right end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the left end (left side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. , and the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

In addition, the second effect image 27TM200 including the background image and the decorative pattern that are reduced in size compared to before the division effect, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are arranged on the left side of the rectangle (on the center side of the screen) rather than on the right side of the rectangle (on the right side of the screen). ) are displayed short, and the upper and lower sides of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between them narrows from the right end (right side of the screen) to the left end (center side of the screen). That is, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are positioned such that the left end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the right end (right side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and closer to the player than the screen.

(First embodiment)
As described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 that receives the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. be. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value. In the first embodiment described below, as an example in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed during the division effect, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. It is characterized by a configuration that does not execute the setting suggestion effect in.

(Specific example of split production)
A specific aspect of the split rendering will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the split effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command with the split effect is the effect image corresponding to the variation pattern designation command with the split effect and various effects determined in the effect determination process at the start of the variation. The performance image is displayed in the performance display area 27TM005A during the variable display period of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (1), before executing the split effect, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, as decoration identification information The variable display of the decoration pattern (main effect pattern) is performed. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , and in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is executed.

The performance control CPU 120 displays a single background image in the performance display area 27TM005A before executing the split performance, and displays a left decorative pattern in the pattern display area 5L on the left side of the center of the performance display region 27TM005A, A central pattern display area 5C of the effect display area 27TM005A displays a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern is displayed in a pattern display area 5R on the right side of the center of the effect display area 27TM005A.

The display mode of the background image and the decoration pattern before the division effect is a mode in which a plurality of decoration patterns (left decoration pattern, middle decoration pattern, right decoration pattern) are superimposed on a rectangular background image at equal intervals and in the same size. It's becoming That is, the background image and the decoration pattern are arranged parallel to the screen in a virtual three-dimensional space, and the background image and the decoration pattern are viewed from a viewpoint perpendicular to the screen (on the player side of the screen). It has a form.

In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect display of a combination of two sets of the background image and the decorative pattern based on the background image and the decorative pattern in the information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A in accordance with the execution of the divided effect. Appear on area 27TM005A. One of the combinations becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the first effect image 27TM100 to be displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A in accordance with the execution of the divided effect. The second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen based on the decision to execute the effect control of the first pattern. ing.

Then, in the first design display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the first decoration design as the decoration identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the variability display of the first special design. In the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the effect image 27TM200, the second decoration symbol as the decoration identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed first special symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first small symbols in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays "3" in the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. "0" is displayed continuously. In addition, the active display area 27TM031 continues to display the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 continues to display three first reserved displays 27TM010. I am displaying.

That is, in the present embodiment, the split effect is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen. Even when 27TM200 is displayed, each position of the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015, the second reserved memory number special display area 27TM025, the active display area 27TM031, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 is divided. Without changing from each position before the start of the production, the first reserved memory number "3", the second reserved memory number "0", the active display 27TM030, and the first reserved display 27TM010 are set to each position before the start of the divided production is displayed continuously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-2(3), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the split effect was executed, the effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. During the enlarged display period in which the first effect image 27TM100 is gradually enlarged and displayed, the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200, and the player can are displayed in a superimposed manner so that they can be seen in front when viewed from above). As described above, regarding the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period, the relation of the second effect image 27TM200<the first effect image 27TM100 is established. In the area where the effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 overlap, the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the visibility of the second effect image 27TM200.

After the first effect image 27TM100 is further enlarged and displayed from the state of FIG. 10-2(3) to completely cover the second effect image 27TM200 (after the second effect image 27TM200 becomes completely invisible). Finally, the rectangle of the first effect image 27TM100 (the first effect image frame 27TM110) is enlarged and displayed until it overlaps the rectangle of the effect display area 27TM005A (the state shown in FIG. 10-2 (4) is reached. when) the split presentation ends.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 (3) and (4), at the timing when the split effect ends, the first decorative symbols displayed in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100 are , and after the division effect is completed, it is displayed as a decoration pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display area 27TM005A.

Thus, the first effect information is displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A for a longer display period than the second effect information. Further, the first effect information when the split effect ends and the effect information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A after the end of the split effect are common effect information (for example, the same combination of decorative patterns). Since it has, the continuity of the production is ensured from the execution of the divided production to after the end of the divided production.

Therefore, for the player, the first performance information, which continues to display the same performance information even after the end of the split performance, is the true performance information, and is hidden after the end of the split performance. It can also be said that the second effect information (movie associated with the variation pattern in advance) is false effect information. Also, the first effect information whose visibility is higher when the split effect ends is the true effect information, and the second effect information whose visibility is lower when the split effect ends (previously changed pattern It can also be said that the movie associated with .

(Determination of fluctuation pattern)
As described above, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining variation patterns. The CPU 103, based on the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the display result of the variation display (“loss” or “big hit”) determined at the start of the variation of the special symbols, and the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, A variation pattern of the variation display is determined. Then, a variation pattern specification command specifying a variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 .

In this embodiment, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for losing is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result will be “loss”, and the variation display result is “big hit”. A big hit variation pattern determination table to be used when predetermined is prepared in advance.

(Variation pattern type)
As shown in FIG. 10-3, in the present embodiment, as the types of fluctuation patterns for loss, there are various types of "non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", "super reach A loss", and "super reach B loss". There is Then, for each type of each variation pattern, each corresponding to the presence or absence of the execution of the split effect, the mode of the split effect (second display movie type), and the number of executions of the pseudo-run and the mode of the pseudo-run (pseudo-run type). Variation patterns exist.

For the variation pattern type of "non-reach loss", the combination of decoration patterns indicating that the change display result is finally "loss" without the reach state being established after the start of the variable display is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern type of "Normal reach lost" is that after the variable display starts and the reach state is established, the super reach effect (battle effect) described later is not executed, and the change display result is finally "missed". It is the type of variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the combination is fixed and stopped.

The variation pattern type of "super reach A lost" is whether or not a big win is won by a battle between a friend character and an enemy character A as a super reach effect after the variable display is started and the reach state is established. A battle effect A is executed to notify whether or not the character is defeated by the enemy character A. Further, a effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character A, and finally the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is "lost" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern type of ``super reach B lost'' is whether or not a big win is won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy character B as a super reach effect after the variable display is started and the reach state is established. A battle effect B is executed to notify whether or not the character is defeated by the enemy character B. Further, a effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character B, and finally the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is "lost" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this embodiment, there are various kinds of "normal reach jackpot", "super reach A jackpot", and "super reach B jackpot" as the types of jackpot variation patterns. Then, for each type of each variation pattern, each corresponding to the presence or absence of the execution of the split effect, the mode of the split effect (second display movie type), and the number of executions of the pseudo-run and the mode of the pseudo-run (pseudo-run type). Variation patterns exist.

The variation pattern type of "normal reach big hit" is that after the variable display starts and the reach state is established, the super reach effect (battle effect) described later is not executed, and the change display result is finally "big hit". It is the type of variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the combination is fixed and stopped.

The variation pattern type of "super reach A big win" is whether or not a big win is won by having a battle between a friend character and an enemy character A as a super reach effect after the variable display is started and the reach state is established. A battle effect A is executed to notify whether or not, and further a effect is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character A, and finally the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is a "big hit" is confirmed and stopped. It is a type of fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern type of ``super reach B big hit'' is whether or not a big hit is won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy character B as a super reach effect after the variable display is started and the ready state is established. A battle effect B is executed to notify whether or not, and further a effect is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character B, and finally the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is a "big hit" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

In this way, in the variation patterns involving super reach (“super reach A lost” and “super reach B lost”, and “super reach A jackpot” and “super reach B jackpot”), after the reach state is established, As a super ready-to-win effect, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a big win is won by a battle between a friend character and an enemy character. Then, when the final display result is "big win" (when the big win pattern is confirmed and stopped), an effect is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, and when the final display result is "losing" (losing pattern) is fixed and stopped), an effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 10-3, the variation pattern type of “non-reach loss”, the variation pattern type of “normal reach loss”, the variation pattern type of “super reach A loss”, and “super reach B A determination value for determining a variation pattern whose display result is "loss" is assigned to each variation pattern corresponding to each variation pattern type of "loss".

In the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-4, each variation of the variation pattern type of "normal reach jackpot", the variation pattern type of "super reach A jackpot", and the variation pattern type of "super reach B jackpot" Each variation pattern corresponding to the pattern type is assigned a determination value for determining a variation pattern with a display result of "big hit".

(Pseudo Ren)
In this embodiment, whether or not a pseudo-run is executed and the number of times of execution when the pseudo-run is executed are set for each variation pattern. When a variation pattern that executes a pseudo-run one or more times is determined, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command designating the variation pattern causes the image display device 5 to display the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern. The pseudo-run will be executed one or more times during the period.

Pseudo-run means that during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the determination and stopping of the decorative symbols and the derivation and display of the display results, decorations are displayed in the display areas of the left, middle, and right symbols. This is an effect in which the symbols are once temporarily stopped and then variably displayed again. By executing the pseudo-run, within the period during which the special symbols are displayed once, that is, within the period during which the decorative symbols are varied and displayed based on one variation pattern designation command corresponding to one reserved memory, it is as if It is possible to make it look as if the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed a plurality of times.

In the pseudo-run shown in this embodiment, decorative patterns consisting of numbers are temporarily stopped in the display area of the left pattern and the display area of the right pattern, respectively, and then the characters "NEXT" are displayed in the display area of the middle pattern. After the pseudo consecutive symbols (pseudo consecutive symbols 27TM300 shown in FIGS. 10-9 (A2) and (B2) to be described later) are temporarily stopped, decorative symbols in the display areas of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed. is resumed (so-called re-variation is performed). Here, "a state in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped" is a state in which the decorative design does not stop completely and moves slightly up and down, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, a state in which the decorative design is swinging, A state in which the decorative pattern repeats enlargement and reduction, and a state in which the decorative pattern is in a different form (deformed) from that at the time of final stop (at the time of finalizing the design) may be acceptable.

Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, there are pseudo-runs of type X with a low expectation of a big hit and pseudo-runs of a type Y with a high expectation of a big hit as the types of pseudo-runs.

(Loss fluctuation pattern)
As the variation pattern type of "non-reach loss", there is only a variation pattern of "non-reach loss [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" in which no division effect is executed and pseudo-run is not executed.

When the display result is "loss", the variation pattern of "non-reach loss [no split effect, no pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 60%.

As the variation pattern type of "normal reach loss", the variation pattern of "normal reach loss [no split effect, no pseudo run]" in which the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-run is not performed, and the split effect is not performed, the degree of expectation is There is a variation pattern of “normal reach lost [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type X)]” in which a pseudo-run of low type X is executed once.

If the display result is "lost", the variation pattern of "normal reach lost [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" is selected at a rate of 7%, and "normal reach lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 1 time ( Type X)]” is selected at a rate of 5.5%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super reach A failure", split effect is not executed and pseudo-run is not performed "Super reach A failure [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" variation pattern and split effect is not performed , The variation pattern of “Super reach A lost [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type X)]” in which a pseudo-run of type X with a low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level Variation pattern of “Super Reach A lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]” in which pseudo-run of type X with low is executed twice, and type with high expectation without split effect There is a variation pattern of “super reach A lost [no division effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]” in which the pseudo-run of Y is executed twice.

When the display result is "lost", the variation pattern of "super reach A lost [no split effect, no pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 3.5%, and "super reach A lost [no split effect]". , pseudo-run 1 time (type X)]” is selected at a rate of 3%, and the variation pattern of “super reach A lost [no division effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]” is 2.5 %, and the variation pattern of "super reach A lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 2%.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach A lost", the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Among them, a split effect is performed in which movie A (short), which has a short playback period, is played back, and a pseudo-run of type Y, which has a high degree of expectation, is performed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-continue twice (type Y)]” and a first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Control is executed, and a split effect is executed in which movie A (long), which has a longer reproduction period among movie A types, is reproduced. There is a variation pattern of reach A missing [first pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-continuation 2 times (type Y)]”.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach A lost", the second pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the type of movie A is executed. Among them, a split effect is performed in which movie A (short), which has a short playback period, is played back, and a pseudo-run of type Y, which has a high degree of expectation, is performed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-continuation twice (type Y)]” and a second pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen. Control is executed, and a split effect is executed in which movie A (long), which has a longer reproduction period among movie A types, is reproduced. There is a variation pattern of reach A missing [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]”.

If the display result is "missing", the variation pattern of "super reach A losing [first pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" is 1.5% selected at a rate of 1%, and the variation pattern of "super reach A lost [first pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%, and "super reach A Loss [2nd pattern split effect (movie A (short)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” variation pattern is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and “super reach A miss [second pattern split effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-continuation twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super reach B loss", the variation pattern of "Super reach B loss [no split effect, no pseudo run]" in which split effect is not executed and pseudo-run is not performed, and split effect is not performed , Variation pattern of “super reach B lost [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type X)]” in which pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is executed once, and split effect is not executed, expectation level A variation pattern of “Super reach B lost [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type Y)]” in which a pseudo-run of type Y with a high value is executed once, and a type with low expectations without a split effect Variation pattern of “Super reach B lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]” in which X pseudo-run is executed twice, and pseudo-type Y with high expectation without split effect There is a variation pattern of “super reach B lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]” in which the run is executed twice.

When the display result is "loss", the variation pattern of "super reach B failure [no split effect, no pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and "super reach B failure [no split effect]" is selected. , pseudo-run 1 time (type X)]” is selected at a rate of 2%, and the variation pattern of “super reach B lost [no split effect, pseudo-run 1 time (type Y)]” is 1.5 %, and the variation pattern of ``Super reach B lost [no split effect, pseudo consecutive 2 times (type X)]'' is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and ``Super reach B lost [no split effect , pseudo-run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach B lost", the first pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, and the type of movie B is executed. Among them, a split effect is performed in which movie B (short), which has a short playback period, is played back, and a pseudo-play of type Y, which has a high degree of expectation, is performed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-continuation twice (type Y)]”, and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the control being executed, a split effect is executed in which movie B (long), which has a longer reproduction period among the types of movie B, is reproduced, and a pseudo-continuation of type Y with high expectations is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach B loss [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]”.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach B lost", the second pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the type of movie B is executed. Among them, a split effect is performed in which movie B (short), which has a short playback period, is played back, and a pseudo-play of type Y, which has a high degree of expectation, is performed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-continue twice (type Y)]” and a second pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen. Along with the control being executed, a split effect is executed in which movie B (long), which has a longer reproduction period among the types of movie B, is reproduced, and a pseudo-continuation of type Y with high expectations is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach B loss [second pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]”.

If the display result is "missing", the variation pattern of "super reach B losing [first pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" at a rate of 1% Selected, the variation pattern of "super reach B lost [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%, "super reach B Loss [Second pattern split effect (movie B (short)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” variation pattern is selected at a rate of 1%, and “Super reach B loss [second pattern split effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 0.5%.

(Jackpot variation pattern)
As the variation pattern type of "Normal reach jackpot", the variation pattern of "Normal reach jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo run]" in which split effects are not executed and pseudo-runs are not performed, and the expectation level is There is a variation pattern of “normal reach jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type X)]” in which a pseudo-run of low type X is executed once.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "normal reach big win [no split effect, no pseudo-run]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and "normal reach big win [no split effect, pseudo-run 1]" is selected. times (type X)]” is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super reach A jackpot", the variation pattern of "Super reach A jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo run]" in which split effects are not executed and pseudo-runs are not performed, and split effects are not performed , Variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type X)]" in which pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is executed once, and split effect is not executed, expectation level Variation pattern of "Super reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]" in which pseudo-run of type X with low is executed twice, and type with high expectation without split effect There is a variation pattern of "super reach A jackpot [no division effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]" in which Y's pseudo-run is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [no split effect, no pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "super reach A big hit [no split effect]" is selected. , pseudo-run 1 time (type X)]” is selected at a rate of 2%, and the variation pattern of “super reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]” is 2.5 %, and the variation pattern of "super reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 5%.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach A big hit", the first pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left part of the screen, and the type of movie A is executed. Among them, a split effect is performed in which movie A (short), which has a short playback period, is played back, and a pseudo-run of type Y, which has a high degree of expectation, is performed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-continue twice (type Y)]” and a first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Control is executed, and a split effect is executed in which movie A (long), which has a longer reproduction period among movie A types, is reproduced. Reach A jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” variation pattern exists.

As the variation pattern type of "super reach A big hit", the second pattern effect control is executed in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the type of movie A is executed. Among them, a split effect is performed in which movie A (short), which has a short playback period, is played back, and a pseudo-run of type Y, which has a high degree of expectation, is performed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-continuation twice (type Y)]” and a second pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen. Control is executed, and a split effect is executed in which movie A (long), which has a longer reproduction period among movie A types, is reproduced. Reach A jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” variation pattern exists.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach A big hit [first pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" at a rate of 6% Selected, the variation pattern of "Super reach A jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 7%, "Super reach A jackpot [ 2nd pattern split effect (movie A (short)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 6%, and “super reach A jackpot [second pattern split effect (movie A ( Long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super reach B jackpot", the variation pattern of "Super reach B jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo run]" in which split effects are not executed and pseudo-runs are not performed, and split effects are not performed , Variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type X)]" in which pseudo-run of type X with low expectation is executed once, and split effect is not executed, expectation level Variation pattern of “Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo-run (type Y)]” in which pseudo-run of type Y with high is executed once, and type with low expectation without split effect Variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]" in which X pseudo-run is executed twice, and pseudo-type Y with high expectation without split effect There is a variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]" in which the run is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach B big hit [no split effect, no pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 2%, and "super reach B big hit [no split effect, pseudo run]" is selected at a rate of 2%. 1 consecutive (type X)]” variation pattern is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and the variation pattern of “super reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo consecutive 1 time (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 3%. Selected by the ratio, the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 3%, "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-run 2 times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variation pattern type of the "super reach B jackpot", the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Among them, a split effect is performed in which movie B (short), which has a short playback period, is played back, and a pseudo-run of type Y, which is highly expected, is performed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-continuation twice (type Y)]”, and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the control being executed, a split effect is executed in which movie B (long), which has a longer reproduction period among the types of movie B, is reproduced, and a pseudo-continuation of type Y with high expectations is executed twice. Reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” variation pattern exists.

As the variation pattern type of the "super reach B jackpot", the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the effect control of the second pattern is executed, and the type of the movie B is executed. Among them, a split effect is performed in which movie B (short), which has a short playback period, is played back, and a pseudo-run of type Y with a high degree of expectation is performed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-continue twice (type Y)]” and a second pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right part of the screen. Along with the control being executed, a split effect is executed in which movie B (long), which has a longer reproduction period among the types of movie B, is reproduced, and a pseudo-continuation of type Y with high expectations is executed twice. Reach B jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” variation pattern exists.

When the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach B big hit [first pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" at a rate of 10% Selected, the variation pattern of "Super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 12%, "Super reach B jackpot [ 2nd pattern split effect (movie B (short)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 10%, and “super reach B jackpot [second pattern split effect (movie B ( Long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]” is selected at a rate of 12%.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the variation pattern of "super reach A missing" is The ratio of selection is [3.5+3+2.5+2+1.5+1+1.5+1=16%], and the ratio of selection of the variation pattern of "super reach B loss" is [2.5+2+1.5+1.5+1+1+0.5+1+0. 5=11.5%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the variation of "super reach A big hit" The rate at which the pattern is selected is [1.5 + 2 + 2.5 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 6 + 7 = 37%], and the rate at which the “super reach B jackpot” variation pattern is selected is [2 + 2.5 + 3 + 3 + 7 + 10 + 12 + 10 + 12 = 61.5%].

In this way, when the variation pattern of "super reach B" is selected than when the variation pattern of "super reach A" is selected, the percentage of the display result becoming "big hit" is higher. there is

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), in the variation pattern with super reach, "split effect Since the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "no execution" is the ratio of [super reach A (no division effect execution) + super reach B (no division effect execution)], [(3.5 + 3 + 2.5 + 2) + ( 2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1.5 + 1) = 19.5%], and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern “with split effect execution” in the variation pattern with super reach is [super reach A (with split effect execution) + Super reach B (with split effect execution)], so [(1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1) + (1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5) = 8%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), in the variation pattern with super reach " Since the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "no division effect execution" is the ratio of [super reach A (no division effect execution) + super reach B (no division effect execution)], [(1.5 + 2 + 2.5 + 5) + (2 + 2.5 + 3 + 3 + 7) = 28.5%], and the ratio of the variation pattern “with split effect execution” selected in the variation pattern with super reach is [super reach A (with split effect execution) + super reach B (with division effect execution)], so [(6+7+6+7)+(10+12+10+12)=70%].

In this way, when the variation pattern "with split effect execution" is selected, the display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" than when the variation pattern "without split effect execution" is selected. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), "pseudo repeat count 0 (none)" The rate at which the variation pattern is selected is [non-reach lost (pseudo-run number 0 (none)) + normal reach lost (pseudo-run number 0 (none)) + super reach A lost (pseudo-run number 0 (none) )) + Super Reach B is the rate of loss (0 pseudo-runs (none))], so [60 + 7 + 3.5 + 2.5 = 73%], and the variation pattern of “1 pseudo-run” is selected. is the ratio of [No normal reach (1 pseudo-run) + Super reach A (1 pseudo-run) + Super reach B (1 pseudo-run)], so [5.5 + 3 + ( 2 + 1.5) = 12%], and the percentage of selection of the variation pattern of “2 pseudo-runs” is [super reach A missed (pseudo run 2 times) + super reach B missed (pseudo run 2 times)], so [(2.5+2+1.5+1+1.5+1)+(1.5+1+1+0.5+1+0.5)=15%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), "pseudo consecutive times 0 (no )” variation pattern is selected as follows: [Normal reach jackpot (pseudo run count 0 (none)) + Super reach A jackpot (pseudo run count 0 (none)) + Super reach B jackpot (pseudo run count 0 times (none))], so it is [0.5 + 1.5 + 2 = 4%]. times) + super reach A jackpot (1 pseudo run) + super reach B jackpot (1 pseudo run)], so [1 + 2 + (2.5 + 3) = 8.5%], The rate at which the “pseudo-run 2 times” variation pattern is selected is the rate of [super reach A jackpot (pseudo-run 2 times) + super reach B jackpot (pseudo-run 2 times)], so [(2 .5+5+6+7+6+7)+(3+7+10+12+10+12)=87.5%].

In this way, regarding the relationship between the variation pattern of "0 pseudo-runs (none)", the variation pattern of "1 pseudo-runs", and the variation pattern of "2 pseudo-runs", the display result is " The percentage of "big hits" is higher in the order of "0 pseudo-runs (none)"<"1 pseudo-runs"<"2 pseudo-runs". Therefore, the player expects many pseudo-runs to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the pseudo-run is executed. The rate at which type X is selected as the type is [5.5+3+2.5+2+1.5=14.5%], and the rate at which pseudo-runs are executed and type Y is selected as the type of the pseudo-run is [ 2+1.5+1+1.5+1+1.5+1+1+0.5+1+0.5=12.5%].

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is a "big win" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), a pseudo-run is executed. The rate at which type X is selected as the type is [1+2+2.5+2.5+3=11%], and the rate at which pseudo-runs are executed and type Y is selected as the type of the pseudo-run is [5+6+7+6+7+3+7+10+12+10+12=85%]. ].

In this way, the variation pattern in which the type Y pseudo-run is executed has a higher percentage of the display result being a "big win" than the variation pattern in which the type X pseudo-run is executed.

(Production decision processing at the time of start winning)
FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the time of start winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning time effect determination process shown in FIG.

In the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first issues a set of start winning commands (for example, symbol designation command, variable category command, and the first reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S27TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not a big hit will be determined, among the results of determination at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win will occur and the type of the big win in the case of a big win based on the random number for judging the big win and the random number for judging the kind of the big win extracted at the time of starting winning, and designates the result of the judgment. Output the specified command. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines, based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, whether or not normal reach or super reach or not, and whether or not split effects are executed. Output a variation category command that specifies the judgment result. Further, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103, based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the start winning and the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. It is possible to determine the corresponding variation pattern before executing the variation display corresponding to the start winning, and to transmit the variation category command based on the determination result to the effect control CPU 120 . Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can confirm whether or not the divided effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning before receiving the variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores a set of commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine whether or not If the command for one set of start winning has not been newly received (NO in step S27TM1000), the process is terminated as it is.

If one set of starting winning command has been newly received (YES in step S27TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the split effect based on the variable category command received from the CPU 103. (step S27TM1010).

If it is not determined to execute the split effect (NO in step S27TM1010), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM1030. If it is determined to execute a split effect (YES in step S27TM1010), effect control CPU 120 sets a change prohibition flag (step S27TM1020), and advances the process to step S27TM1030. The change prohibition flag is set (turned on) at step S27TM1020, and is reset (turned off) at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the received command at the time of starting winning is completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S27TM1030). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the process ends. If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the final display mode for active display is determined based on the final display mode determination table for active display (see FIG. 9-3(A)) (step S16TM1010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change pattern and whether or not the first change effect is executed and the number of times of execution based on the active display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-3 (B)). (step S16TM1020).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pending display change pattern based on the pending display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 9-4) (step S16TM1030), and terminates the process.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2(1) to 10-2(4), the first pending display 27TM010 is the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect 27TM100 regardless of whether or not the split effect is being executed. The active display 27TM030 is displayed in the active display area 27TM031 that is different from the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200. It is

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5, when the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S16TM1010 to S16TM1030 to display active or pending display. It is possible to execute the first change performance by determining whether or not to execute the first change performance for changing the mode. On the other hand, when the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the processing of steps S16TM1010 to S16TM1030 is skipped and the processing is terminated as it is, so the first change effect cannot be executed. .

In this way, if it is determined to execute the split effect in the determination at the time of the start winning, the period from the time of the start winning to the end of the variable display that was the determination target at the time of the start winning, the suspended display and the active By not changing the display mode of the display, the player's interest can be directed to "whether or not the split effect is executed". Also, by not changing the display modes of the pending display and the active display when the split effect is being executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the split effect.

In addition, if it is determined that the split effect will be executed in the judgment at the time of the start winning, the period from the time of the start winning to the start of the variable display that was the determination target at the time of the start winning will be displayed on hold or active Although it is allowed to change the display mode of the display (although the first change effect can be executed), during the execution of the variable display with the split effect (or during the execution of the split effect), the suspension display and the active display The display mode may not be changed (the first change effect may be made unexecutable).

Assuming that the display mode of the active display is changed while the split effect is being executed, depending on the timing at which the mode of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 and the display mode of the active display change, Since there is a possibility that the player can easily grasp which image on the left or right is the first effect image 27TM100 (that is, whether it is the true image for the player), at least the split effect is executed. It is preferable not to execute the action effect for the active display during the period.

On the other hand, while the variable display accompanying the split effect is being executed (or the split effect is being executed), the display mode of the pending display may not be changed, but the display mode of the active display may be changed. . For example, by making it possible to change the display mode of the active display, which is the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display with the split effect, how the active display changes when the split effect is executed. The player can be interested in whether to

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to be capable of executing an action effect acting on the pending display or the active display. For example, the display mode of the pending display or active display hit by the ball may be changed in accordance with execution of the effect effect that the ball thrown by the character hits the pending display or active display.

Then, when it is determined to execute the split effect in the determination at the time of the start winning, the action effect is not executed during the period from the time of the start winning to the end of the variable display that was the determination target at the time of the start winning. can be

In addition, if it is determined that the split effect will be executed in the judgment at the time of the start winning, the action effect will be executed during the period from the time of the start winning to the start of the variable display that was the target of the determination at the time of the start winning. Although it is possible, it is also possible not to execute the effect performance during execution of the variable display accompanied by the division performance (or during execution of the division performance).

In addition, if it is determined that the split effect will be executed in the determination at the time of the start winning, the period from the time of the start winning to the end of the variable display that was the determination target at the time of the start winning, the suspension display and active display The action effect may be executable while the display mode is not changed (the first change effect is unexecutable). For example, although an action effect is executed in which the ball thrown by the character hits the pending display or the active display, as a result, the display mode of the pending display or the active display hit by the ball may not be changed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display of the suspended display or the active display is greater during the period in which the split effect is executed during the variable display than in the period in which the divided effect is not executed during the variable display. The execution ratio of the effect that changes the mode (the effect that acts on the pending display or the active display) is lowered.

(Specific example of production video)
Next, specific examples of effect moving images will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of [Movie A], which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the split effect is executed. -7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of [MOVIE B], which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the divided effect is executed.

As described above, when the divided effect is executed in this embodiment, a predetermined movie image corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. Then, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

(Specific example of movie A)
As shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), when the divided effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second decorative pattern of "2" in the second design display area 5L2 and the second design display area 5R2, and the second design display area 5C2. The pseudo consecutive symbols 27TM300 are temporarily stopped, and white effect images 27TM400A are displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2, respectively. At this time, the second decorative pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the second decorative design, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<effect image<second decorative design.

In the example in which the movie A is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-run effect image 27TM300A, which will be described later, is not displayed when the pseudo-run pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped. low degree) is being executed. In addition, in the example in which Movie A is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A does not have a mode (blue or red) suggesting a set value like the fourth setting suggesting effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (3), the effect control CPU 120 performs the first re-variation display of the second decorative design in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. let it run.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(4), the effect control CPU 120 stops the second decorative symbol "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. By displaying it, a ready-to-reach state is set, and characters of "reach!!" are displayed on the upper part of the second effect image 27TM200.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the central part of the second effect image 27TM200 while continuing the ready-to-win state, and the operation of the push button 31B. A time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the is effective is displayed. Since the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern from the player's point of view. It looks like

In this embodiment, when the time bar 27TM360 is initially displayed, the remaining time is displayed as 100%. At the end timing, the remaining time is displayed as 0%.

However, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are merely objects in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern. Actually, the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled even during the display period of the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and the operation is not detected by the operation detecting means of the push sensor 35B.

In this embodiment, when the time bar 27TM360 is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the push button 31B is operated by the player at the timing when the remaining time of the time bar 27TM360 is displayed as 20%, as will be described later. Regardless of whether or not it has actually been performed, an effect image simulating the form of the cut-in forewarning effect, which will be described later, is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (5), in response to the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the time bar 27TM360 is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar 27TM360 to the remaining 25%. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (6), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 20%, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the push button 31B is actually operated by the player. Regardless of whether or not, the cut-in image 27TM370A displaying the characters "Chance?" is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. However, the cut-in image displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern. This cut-in image 27TM370A is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

In this way, at the timing when the remaining operation effective period indicated by the time bar 27TM360 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 reaches the predetermined period (remaining 20%), the cut-in image is displayed regardless of the actual operation. will be displayed. That is, when the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the same effect as when the push button 31B is actually operated and the operation is detected by the operation detection means of the push sensor 35B is executed. Become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6(7), the effect control CPU 120 causes the characters "battle" to be displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, and the friend character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) to be displayed. The image of the battle production which performs a battle is displayed. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed along with the characters "Expectation" at the bottom center of the image of the battle production, and the number of object images 27TM550 indicates the degree of expectation for a big win. there is However, the object image 27TM550 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the variation pattern.

(Specific example of Movie B)
As shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the divided effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second decorative pattern of "2" in the second design display area 5L2 and the second design display area 5R2, and the second design display area 5C2. The pseudo consecutive symbols 27TM300 are temporarily stopped, and white effect images 27TM400A are displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2, respectively. At this time, the second decorative pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the second decorative design, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<effect image<second decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A as the second effect image 27TM200.

In the example where the movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-run effect image 27TM300A is displayed when the pseudo-run pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped. pseudo-runs are being executed. In addition, in the example in which Movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A is not in a mode (blue or red) suggesting a set value like the fourth setting suggesting effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(4), the effect control CPU 120 performs the first re-variation display of the second decorative symbols in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. let it run.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(5), the effect control CPU 120 stops the second decorative symbol "5" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. By displaying it, a ready-to-reach state is set, and characters of "reach!!" are displayed on the upper part of the second effect image 27TM200.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the central part of the second effect image 27TM200 while continuing the ready-to-win state, and the operation of the push button 31B. A time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the is effective is displayed. Since the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern from the player's point of view. It looks like

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (6), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the time bar 27TM360 was displayed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar 27TM360 to the remaining 25%. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (7), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 20%, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the push button 31B is actually operated by the player. Regardless of whether or not, the cut-in image 27TM370B displaying the characters "Chance!" is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. This cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7(8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "battle" as the second effect image 27TM200, and the friend character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed. The image of the battle production which performs a battle is displayed. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed along with the characters "Expectation" at the bottom center of the image of the battle production, and the number of object images 27TM550 indicates the degree of expectation for a big win. there is

(Playback control of production video)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, [Movie A (short)] and , [Movie A (long)], [Movie B (short)], and [Movie B (long)]. FIG. 10-8 is a time chart showing the reproduction period of each effect moving image when the split effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, when [movie A (short)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [movie A] (timing T0). ), and after displaying the effect images of [Movie A] shown in FIGS. Further, when [movie A (long)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [movie A] (timing of T0), as shown in FIG. 10-6 ( After displaying the effect image of [movie A] shown in 1) to (7), the display of the effect image of [movie A] is ended (timing of TA2).

Here, the effect images of [Movie A (Short)] (Fig. 10-6 (1) to (3)) and the effect images of the first half of [Movie A (Long)] (Fig. 10-6 (1) to ( 3)) are common. Therefore, to play back [Movie A (Short)], it is sufficient to execute control to play back the first half of [Movie A (Long)]. Therefore, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores the effect data related to [Movie A (long)], and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern designation command, the first half of [Movie A (long)] Whether to control the display of only [Movie A (Short)] (playback of [Movie A (Short)]) or to control the display of the entire (full) portion of [Movie A (Long)] ([Movie A (Long)] )] is to be reproduced), and display control is executed based on the determination, two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

Further, when [movie B (short)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [movie B] (timing of T0), as shown in FIG. 10-7 ( After displaying the effect image of [movie B] shown in 1) to (4), the display of the effect image of [movie B] is ended (timing of TB1). Further, when [movie B (long)] is selected as the effect moving image type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [movie B] (timing of T0), as shown in FIG. 10-7 ( After displaying the effect image of [movie B] shown in 1) to (8), the display of the effect image of [movie B] is ended (timing of TB2).

Here, the effect images of [Movie B (Short)] (Fig. 10-7 (1) to (4)) and the effect images of the first half of [Movie B (Long)] (Fig. 10-7 (1) to ( 4)) are common. Therefore, to reproduce [Movie B (Short)], it is sufficient to execute control to reproduce the first half of [Movie B (Long)]. Therefore, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores the effect data related to [Movie B (long)], and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern designation command, the first half of [Movie B (long)] Whether to control the display of only [Movie B (Short)] (playback of [Movie B (Short)]) or to control the display of the entire (full) portion of [Movie B (Long)] ([Movie B (Long)]) )] is to be reproduced), and display control is executed based on the determination, two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, by providing a plurality of end timings for one effect moving image stored in the ROM 121, there is no need to store individual effect moving images for each variation pattern involving a split effect. It is possible to prevent the storage capacity of performance data from excessively increasing. Also, by varying the end timing of one effect moving image according to the variation pattern, it is possible to make it appear to the player as if a plurality of effect moving images are prepared.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "missing", the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "movie A (short)" is [1.5 + 1.5] = 3%, and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "movie A (long)" is [1 + 1] = 2%, while the display result is "big hit" In this case, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected is [6+6]=12%, and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "movie A (long)" is selected is [7+7]=14 %. Therefore, when the variation pattern of "movie A (long)" is selected, the ratio of winning big is higher than when the variation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "missing", the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "movie B (short)" is [1 + 1] = 2%, and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "movie B (long)" is [0.5 + 0.5] = 1%, while the display result is "big hit" In this case, the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "movie B (short)" is [10+10]=20%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "movie B (long)" is [12+12]=24 %. Therefore, when the variation pattern of "movie B (long)" is selected, the ratio of winning big is higher than when the variation pattern of "movie B (short)" is selected.

Therefore, when "movie A" is reproduced, the longer the reproduction period is (the later the end timing is, the higher the expectation of a big hit is), and when "movie B" is reproduced, the longer the reproduction period is. The more (the later the end timing), the higher the expectation of a big hit. By performing such effect control, the player can, once the split effect is executed (once the movie is played back), continue the split effect as long as possible (the movie is played back as long as possible). come to expect.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "missing", the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "movie A" is [1.5+1+1 .5+1]=5%, and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "movie B" is [1+0.5+1+0.5]=3%. , the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "movie A" is [6+7+6+7]=26%, and the rate of selecting the variation pattern of "movie B" is [10+12+10+12]=44%. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-8, when movie B, which is a moving image with a relatively long reproduction period, is played back, the effect is greater when movie A, which is a moving image with a relatively short playback period, is played. However, the percentage of winning is high.

Therefore, the player expects that the movie B will be played back rather than the movie A when the split effect is executed, that is, the effect moving image with a relatively long playback period will be played.

In this embodiment, the longer the reproduction period of the effect animation, the higher the expectation of the big hit. may be higher. Moreover, it is good also as the production|presentation structure which the reproduction|regeneration period of an effect animation and a big-hit expectation degree do not relate to (the big-hit expectation degree does not change with the end timing of an effect animation).

(Concrete example of pseudo continuous effect)
As the pseudo-continuous effect shown in the present embodiment, as described above, the pseudo-continuous effect of type X (hereinafter also referred to as pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak]) and the pseudo-continuous effect of type Y (hereinafter referred to as pseudo-continuous effect [ Y: Strong]). The ratio of the display result of "big win" is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed than when the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] is executed. A specific example of the pseudo continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-9 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B4).

FIGS. 10-9 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo-continuous effect [X: Weak] is executed, and FIG. 10-9. (B1) to (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed.

(Concrete example of pseudo continuous effect [X: Weak])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (A1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, The variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is executed, and in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small pattern (corresponding to the first special pattern information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A2), the effect control CPU 120, along with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [X: Weak], displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R. They are temporarily stopped, and the pseudo consecutive patterns 27TM300 are temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbols to be re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG.

(Concrete example of pseudo continuous effect [Y: Strong])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (B1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to The variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is executed, and in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small pattern (corresponding to the first special pattern information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B2), the effect control CPU 120, along with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], displays the decoration symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R. They are temporarily stopped, and the pseudo consecutive patterns 27TM300 are temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decoration symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, and the pseudo consecutive symbol 27TM300 in the symbol display area 5C. In this state, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed. At this time, the decoration pattern including the pseudo-continued pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the pseudo-continued effect image (the display layer is higher than the pseudo-continued effect image, and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). It is That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous pattern, the pseudo-continuous effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<pseudo-continuous effect image<decorative symbol.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body effect in response to execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], and moves the movable body 27TM600 from the tilted position to the standing position. In this example, the movable body 27TM600 is positioned in front of the pseudo continuous pattern 27TM300 by operating the movable body 27TM600 to the standing position. That is, since the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 related to the pseudo-continuous effect and the movable body 27TM600 after the action are in a corresponding positional relationship, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is an effect image corresponding to the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300, and also the standing position. It is also an effect image corresponding to the movable body 27TM600 in .

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbols to be re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and moves the movable body 27TM600. The movable body presentation is terminated by moving from the standing position to the tilted position.

Thus, when the pseudo-continuous effect [X: Weak] is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is not displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the movable body effect is executed. Instead, the re-variation display of the decorative pattern is executed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: Strong] is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the movable body 27TM600 moves from the tilted position to the standing position. . Next, the decorative pattern is re-variably displayed, and the movable body 27TM600 moves from the upright position to the tilted position.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 10-9, the pseudo-continuous effect [X: Weak] or the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: Strong] is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a state where the divided effects are not being executed. Although an example of execution has been described, the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] and the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image when the divided effect is being executed. At least one of the display areas 27TM200A is executable.

That is, along with the execution of the divided effect, the first decorative pattern as the decoration identification information is variably displayed in the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, and the first Based on the decorative symbols, either pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] or pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] may be executed. In addition, along with the execution of the divided effect, the variable display of the second decoration pattern as the decoration identification information is executed in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Based on the decorative symbols, either pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] or pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] may be executed.

However, in the present embodiment, in the state where the divided effect is not executed (the example shown in FIG. 10-9), the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong]. is displayed and the movable body effect is executed, but in the state where the divided effect is being executed (example shown in FIG. 10-7), the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. In response to this, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.

(Outline of setting suggestion production)
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can execute a third setting suggesting effect and a fourth setting suggesting effect as setting suggesting effects suggesting the set values of the gaming machine. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of executing a third setting suggesting effect and a fourth setting suggesting effect in addition to the first setting suggesting effect and second setting suggesting effect described in [characteristic portion 16TM]. is also possible.

The third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect are the timing at which the decorative patterns stop in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the split effect is not executed (pseudo continuous in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). (including the timing at which the pattern is temporarily stopped), by determining the mode of the effect image displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at different ratios according to the set value, depending on the mode of the displayed effect image It is a production that suggests the setting value.

In addition, the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect are the timing at which the first decoration pattern stops in the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 when the division effect is being executed (the first pattern display area 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 including the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped), the mode of the effect image displayed in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is determined at different ratios according to the setting values. This is an effect that suggests a set value depending on the mode of the displayed effect image.

In this embodiment, (i) when the variation pattern is "non-reach", the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect can be executed at the timing when the decoration symbol stops. (ii) When the variation pattern is "Normal Reach or Super Reach without Pseudo Reach", the timing when the same decoration pattern stops in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R and becomes a Reach state (in the case of split effects, is the timing when the same first decorative symbols stop in the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1 and reach the reach state), the third setting suggesting effect or the fourth setting suggesting effect can be executed. (iii) When the variation pattern is "Normal Reach or Super Reach with Pseudo-Ren", the timing at which the pseudo-Ren symbol first temporarily stops in the symbol display area 5C At the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols first temporarily stop in the area 5C1, the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect can be executed.

The decoration pattern (including the pseudo-continuous pattern) when the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed has a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is visible to the player). displayed in a superimposed manner) so that it can be seen in front of you. That is, the display priority of the decoration pattern (including the pseudo-continuous pattern), the effect image, and the background image when the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed is: background image<effect image<decoration pattern increasing in order.

Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, when the third setting suggestion effect is executed, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (when the split effect is executed, the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1) is displayed in gold color, and when the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (when the split effect is executed, the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1) is displayed in blue or red.

Further, in the present embodiment, when neither the third setting suggestion effect nor the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (when the split effect is executed, the first symbol display area 5L1 , 5C1, 5R1) becomes white.

In this way, by displaying the setting suggestion information (effect image) suggesting the setting value corresponding to the stop position of the decorative pattern, the player can display not only the stopped decorative pattern but also the decorative pattern. We will also pay attention to the setting suggestion information that is provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, setting suggestion is not performed with the second effect image 27TM200. None of the images related to the setting suggestion effect are displayed. Therefore, the effect image of the decorative design displayed in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 is white.

(Outline of cut-in notice effect)
Next, description will be given of the notice effect for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state. In this example, a cut-in notice effect can be executed as the notice effect. The cut-in notice effect is a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-13 (2) to (4) to be described later, the effect control CPU 120 establishes a ready-to-win state with the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the split effect is not executed. 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Display the time bar 27TM360.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the screen. . When the cut-in announcement effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire central region in the vertical direction of the screen. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode with a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decoration pattern, and letters of "Reach!!").

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the split effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120, when the reach state is established with the first decorative symbols in the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1, the first At the center of the effect image display area 27TM100A, an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are provided. display.

Then, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the push button 31B being operated by the player. Execute the cut-in announcement effect. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire vertically central region of the first effect image display region 27TM100A. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decoration pattern, and characters of "reach!!") in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(Effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or loss, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and variable display period and effect content of special symbols (Reach and super reach, etc.) to designate a variation pattern designation command, based on the fact that received one set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103), that the variation display of the special symbol is executed, And, it is possible to specify the variable display period of the special symbol and the contents of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

In this embodiment, depending on the variation pattern specification command, the presence or absence of execution of the split effect and the movie type of the split effect (movie A (short), movie A (long), movie B (short), movie B (long)), and The number of pseudo-runs (0, 1, 2) and the type of pseudo-runs (type X, type Y) are specified. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a split effect in response to the variable display of the decoration pattern to be executed based on the received variation pattern designation command, and whether or not to execute the split effect, and whether to execute the split effect in the case of executing the split effect. It is possible to determine the mode, and it is also possible to determine the number of pseudo-runs and the mode of pseudo-runs when the pseudo-runs are to be executed.

FIG. 10-10 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of variation. In this fluctuation-start effect determination process, whether or not to execute each of the third set suggestive effect, the fourth set suggestive effect, and the cut-in advance notice effect, and the effect modes are determined.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands (reserved memory number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command) associated with the start of variable display of special symbols , production control pattern (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production A set of data) is set, and the effect to be executed during the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the designated variation pattern is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 10-10.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value is "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "6") (step S27TM2000). If the setting value is not "6" (that is, if the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is not "6") (NO in step S27TM2000), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM2030. .

If the setting value is "6" (that is, if the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6") (YES in step S27TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 will execute the third setting suggestion effect. Execution/non-execution is determined based on the execution/non-execution decision table (see FIG. 10-11(A)) of the third setting suggestion effect, and the process proceeds to step S27TM2020.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the execution/non-execution determination table for the third setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the third setting suggestion effect is to be executed only when the set value is "6". value is assigned. When the setting value is "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6"), the effect control CPU 120 performs the third setting suggestion effect at a rate of 99.5%. is decided not to be executed, and the third setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 0.5%.

In this way, only when the setting value is "6" (that is, only when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6"), it is determined whether or not the third setting suggestion effect is to be executed. , the third setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. When the third setting suggesting effect is executed, the setting value set for the gaming machine is determined to be "6", so the player can execute the third setting suggesting effect. They will have a great deal of interest in whether or not it is, and expect that the effect image of the decorative pattern will be displayed in gold.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (step S27TM2020). If it is determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (YES in step S27TM2020), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S27TM2040.

If it is not decided to execute the third setting suggestion effect (NO in step S27TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fourth setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode. A determination is made based on the table (see FIG. 10-11(B)), and the process proceeds to step S27TM2040.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(B), in the execution/non-execution determination table for the fourth setting suggestion effect, a determination is made for determining whether or not the fourth setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode according to the set value. value is assigned.

If the setting value is one of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, if the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "1", "3", "5"), the effect control CPU 120 ), it is determined not to execute the fourth set suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute the fourth set suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 40%, and 30 %, it decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode.

The effect control CPU 120, when the set value is one of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "2", "4", "6" ), 30% of the decision is made not to execute the fourth set suggestion effect, 30% of the decision is made to execute the fourth set suggestion effect in the blue mode, and 40 %, it decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode.

In this way, when the set value is one of "1", "3" and "5" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is any one of "1", "3" and "5") , the ratio of displaying the effect image of the decorative pattern in blue is higher than the ratio of displaying the effect image of the decorative pattern in red. On the other hand, if the set value is "2", "4", or "6" (that is, if the set value specified by the set value specifying command is any of "2", "4", or "6", If there is), the ratio of the effect image of the decorative pattern to be displayed in red is higher than the ratio of the effect image of the decorative pattern to be displayed in blue.

Therefore, the fourth setting suggesting effect in which the blue effect image is displayed is an effect suggesting that the setting value is an odd number (the setting value is one of "1", "3", or "5"). there is In addition, the fourth setting suggestion effect in which a red effect image is displayed is an effect that suggests that the setting value is an even number (the setting value is one of "2", "4", or "6"). there is Thus, the fourth setting suggesting effect is an even-odd suggesting effect suggesting whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (step S27TM2040). If the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (YES in step S27TM2040), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the variation pattern is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S27TM2040), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is to be executed and the effect mode in the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution determination table (FIG. 10-11). (C)) (step S27TM2050), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(C), the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution decision table determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command. A judgment value is assigned for

The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 80% when the display result is "miss", and displays the cut-in image 27TM370A ("chance?" at a rate of 15%). A cut-in image with characters displayed) was decided to be executed, and cut-in image 27TM370B (a cut-in image with characters “Chance!”) was displayed at a rate of 8%. and execute the cut-in notice effect of displaying the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image with the words ``great chance!!'') at a rate of 2%. to decide.

The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40% when the display result is a "big hit", and displays the cut-in image 27TM370A ("Chance?" at a rate of 15%). Decided to execute a cut-in notice effect that displays a cut-in image with characters displayed), and displayed a cut-in image 27TM370B (a cut-in image with characters “Chance!”) at a rate of 20%. and execute the cut-in notice effect of displaying the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image with the words ``great chance!!'') at a rate of 25%. to decide.

(Specific example of the third setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the third setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A3). 10-12 (A1) to (A3) show the case where the setting value is "6" (that is, the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6"), and the variation pattern is " It is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the third setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the decorative symbol stops (timing of (i) described above) when the variation pattern is "no reach out".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, The variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is executed, and in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small pattern (corresponding to the first special pattern information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), based on the fact that the variation pattern is "non-reach loss", the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result as "loss" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A combination of non-reach decoration patterns (in this example, "247") is stopped and displayed, and a third setting suggestion effect is executed, and a golden effect image 27TM400D is displayed in each of the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. display.

At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first small symbols in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A3), the effect control CPU 120, which has received a command designating to fix and stop the decoration design from the main board 11, is displayed in the design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. By erasing the golden effect image 27TM400D, the third setting suggestion effect is terminated, and in response to the change display result of the first special symbol being "off", the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R , the combination of decoration symbols ("247" in this example) that results in a display result of "missing" is determined and stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets "247" in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r based on the fact that the combination of decoration patterns to be fixed and stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is "247". , the combination of the first small symbols is fixed and stopped.

(Specific example of the fourth setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the fourth setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B3). 10-12 (B1) to (B3) show the case where the setting value is "6" (that is, the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6"), and the variation pattern is " Let us consider an example in which the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (timing of (iii) described above) when the variation pattern is "Normal Reach or Super Reach with Type X Pseudo-Consecutive". It is an explanatory diagram showing.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 to: The variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is executed, and in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small pattern (corresponding to the first special pattern information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), based on the fact that the variation pattern is "Normal Reach or Super Reach with pseudo-continue of type X", the effect control CPU 120 controls the pseudo-continue effect [X: Weak]. Along with the execution, the decorative symbols "2" are temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, respectively, the pseudo continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, and the fourth setting suggesting effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays a red effect image 27TM400C in each of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the decision to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode. Let

At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first small symbols in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B3), the effect control CPU 120, which has received a command designating to fix and stop the decoration design from the main board 11, is displayed in the design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. By erasing the red effect image 27TM400C, the fourth setting suggesting effect is terminated, and the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first small symbols in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

(Specific example of cut-in notice effect)
Next, a specific example of the cut-in announcement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. FIGS. 10-13(1) to 10-13(4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in announcement effect is executed.

In addition, in FIGS. 10-13, the state of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. The push button mode includes a flashing mode that suggests that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and a normal mode (extinguishing mode) that suggests that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid. .

As shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, The variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is executed, and in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the first small pattern (corresponding to the first special pattern information) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

When the effect image shown in FIG. 10-13 (1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are not displayed and the operation of the push button 31B is valid. The push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) corresponding to the fact that it is not turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 to display the decoration symbol "7" in a ready-to-win state. , to display the characters "reach!!" At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 27TM350 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B at the center of the screen of the image display device 5 while continuing the ready-to-win state, and the operation of the push button 31B. A time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the is effective is displayed. Since the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern from the player's point of view. It looks like

The effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and in response to the operation of the push button 31B becoming valid (in response to the start of the operation valid period), The push button 31B is switched from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the flashing mode.

In an operation standby state in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid (within the operation valid period) but the operation of the push button 31B is not yet detected by the push sensor 35B, an operation prompting display 27TM350 and a time bar 27TM360 are displayed. is displayed continuously. When the time bar 27TM360 is initially displayed, the remaining time is displayed as 100%, and the percentage of the remaining time gradually decreases as time elapses in the operation standby state. In this operation standby state, the push button 31B is blinking.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13(3), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% in accordance with the lapse of the predetermined period of time in the operation standby state. The push button 31B continues to flash in response to the operation standby state.

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the push button 31B within the operation valid period before the display of the time bar 27TM360 becomes 0%. At this time, the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation standby state ends. In response to the end of the operation standby state, the effect control CPU 120 hides (deletes) the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and switches the push button 31B from the blinking mode to the normal mode (extinguishing mode). switch to Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13(4), the cut-in announcement effect is executed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B within the operation valid period.

In the example of the cut-in notice effect shown in FIG. 10-13(4), the cut-in image 27TM370B displaying the characters "chance!" . This cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decoration pattern, and letters of "reach!!"). Further, when the cut-in image is displayed, the push button 31B is pressed in response to the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid (in response to the completion of the operation within the operation valid period). It is in the normal mode (lights off mode).

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is being displayed, suddenly a display mode with a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and the image related to the other effect is displayed) Since a cut-in image that appears to be displayed in front of the image will be displayed, the user will be attracted to the change in the screen when the cut-in notice effect is executed. In addition, since there are a plurality of cut-in images as in this embodiment, the user is also interested in which cut-in image is displayed.

(Setting suggestion effect during execution of split effect)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the split effect is being executed, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. , the setting suggestion effect is not executed. An example of rendering in this case will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 12-19.

FIG. 10-14 is a time chart showing execution timing of each effect when the split effect is executed, and FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19 are effect images of each effect when the split effect is executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of.

In this example, when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the variation pattern is effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the same time, a split effect is performed in which movie B (long), which has a longer playback period among the types of movie B, is played back, and pseudo-runs of type Y with high expectations are performed twice. 1 pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-continuation 2 times (type Y)]” is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 performs decoration patterns based on the variation pattern command in which the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo consecutive 2 times (type Y)]" is specified. change display. In this variation pattern, during the period when the split effect is being executed, after the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed twice in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, as a super reach effect, A battle effect B is executed to inform whether or not a big win is won by a battle between the character and the enemy character B, and a second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen is displayed based on the movie B (long). The effect image will be displayed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect in the red mode in the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start (step S27TM2030), and the cut-in with the characters "great chance!!" It is assumed that it is decided to execute the cut-in announcement effect to display the image 27TM370C (step S27TM2050).

In FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the state of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. The push button mode includes a flashing mode that suggests that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and a normal mode (extinguishing mode) that suggests that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid. .

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5 , the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved memory number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 27TM031 displays an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 displays three first reserved displays 27TM010.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (1), when the divided effect is not executed and the variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the cut-in notice effect (not the timing to display the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360), the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode).

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 starts the divided effect at the timing (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-14) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the decorative pattern variation. In this example, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A set in the right part of the effect display area 27TM005A based on the execution of the effect control of the first pattern. A second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in a second effect image display area 27TM200A set to the left of the area 27TM005A.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the variable display of the first decoration pattern to be executed in the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the first effect image display area 27TM100A along with the start of the split effect. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces [movie B] in the second effect image display area 27TM200A with the start of the divided effect. Therefore, an effect image based on [Movie B] is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. At this time, based on the reproduced [Movie B], the variable display of the second decorative design is executed in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2.

In addition, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The fluctuation display of is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (2) onwards, in the state where the split effect is being executed, regardless of whether or not it is time to execute the cut-in notice effect (the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 ), the push button 31B is in the normal mode (light-out mode).

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 controls the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing to execute the first pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong]. , the first decorative symbols of "3" are temporarily stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1, and the red mode fourth setting suggestion effect is executed (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14). That is, the red effect image 27TM400C is displayed in each of the first pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second decorative symbol "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 at a predetermined timing when the first pseudo continuous effect is executed by the first decorative symbol. are temporarily stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the second symbol display area 5C2, and the white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-14). ).

In this way, when it is determined that neither the third setting suggestion effect nor the fourth setting suggestion effect is to be executed as the second effect image 27TM200 based on [Movie B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. An effect image imitating the effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the red effect image 27TM400C in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. : Strong] is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A (timing T5 shown in FIGS. 10-14). At this time, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image 27TM400C (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A in the second effect image display area 27TM200A while continuously displaying the white effect image 27TM400A in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2 and 5R2. (timing of T5 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

Thus, an effect image simulating the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 based on [MOVIE B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), when the divided effect is not executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed corresponding to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: Strong]. 10-16(4), a pseudo continuous effect [Y: Strong] is executed when the divided effect is being executed. In response to this, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.

In the pseudo-continuous effect when the divided effect is not executed, the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5C and the movable body 27TM600 in the standing position after the operation are in a corresponding positional relationship. The player can easily grasp that the movable body effect is executed corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong].

On the other hand, if the movable object effect is executed along with the pseudo-continuous effect while the divided effect is being executed, the action of the movable object 27TM600 will be either the first effect image 27TM100 or the second effect image 27TM200. It is difficult for the player to recognize whether it corresponds to Further, the movable body 27TM600 in the standing position further reduces the visibility of the effect image displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A which are smaller than the effect display area 27TM005A. Furthermore, it is necessary to set which effect image, the first effect image 27TM100 or the second effect image 27TM200, the movable body control command for controlling the motion of the movable body 27TM600 is to be associated with, and the effect control becomes complicated. do.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the divided effect is being executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed. Here, since the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the same manner as when the divided effect is not executed in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong], the "pseudo-continuous effect [Y : Strong] is executed, but the player's sense of discomfort caused by the fact that the movable body 27TM600 does not move can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (5), the effect control CPU 120 executes re-variation display of the first decorative symbols in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (T6 shown in FIG. 10-14). timing). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes re-variation display of the second decorative design based on [Movie B] in the second design display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 10-14). .

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (6), the effect control CPU 120 controls the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing to execute the second pseudo-continuous effect [Y: Strong]. , the first decorative symbols of "3" are temporarily stopped (timing of T7 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1 (timing T8 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

At this time, effect control CPU 120 displays a ready-to-win state image based on [MOVIE B] in second effect image display area 27TM200A. In this example, the second decoration pattern of "2" is stopped and displayed in the second pattern display area 5L2 and the second pattern display area 5R2 to set the ready-to-win state, and "reach!" !” is displayed, and an operation prompting display 27TM350 and a time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the second effect image display area 27TM200A (timing T7 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (6) to 10-17 (8), in the state where the split effect is being executed, regardless of whether or not the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. , the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode). Here, in FIG. 10-16(6), it is the second effect image display area 27TM200A that the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed, and they are merely displayed as images in the movie. do not have. Therefore, it is not actually the operation effective period, and even if the player operates the push button 31B, execution control of the cut-in notice effect is not performed in response to the operation.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(7), the effect control CPU 120 displays a pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong]. display (timing of T9 shown in FIGS. 10-14). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is the effect image based on [Movie B], is updated to the remaining 50%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (8), the effect control CPU 120 executes the re-variation display of the first decorative symbols in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (at T10 shown in FIG. 10-14). timing). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is the effect image based on [Movie B], has been updated to the remaining 25%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(9), the effect control CPU 120 places the first decorative symbol "3" in the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. A ready-to-win state is established by stopping and displaying each of them, and characters of "Reach!!" is displayed (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 in the second effect image display area 27TM200A is updated to the remaining 20%, regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the "chance !” is displayed in the center of the second effect image display area 27TM200A in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images being displayed (see FIG. 10-14 timing of T11 shown). At this time, a cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A as the effect image based on [MOVIE B].

At the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 10-14, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed based on the decision to execute the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the first effect image display area 27TM100A. and shifts to the operation effective period. By operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period, a cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. However, in the state in which the split effect is being executed, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) regardless of whether the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. In the example shown in 17(9), the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) despite the valid operation period.

In this embodiment, when the split effect is not being executed, the push button 31B changes from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the flashing mode in response to the display of the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360. , and shifts to the operation effective period. Then, a cut-in image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 27TM005A corresponding to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation effective period (see FIG. 10-13).

On the other hand, when the split effect is being executed, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the side of the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the push button 31B changes from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the flashing mode. , and the push button 31B enters the operation effective period while remaining in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) (see FIG. 10-17 (9)). Then, a cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A corresponding to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation valid period (see FIGS. 10-18 (10) described later).

Further, when the divided effect is being executed, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the side of the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the push button 31B changes from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the flashing mode. , and does not transition to the valid operation period (see Fig. 10-16 (6)). A cut-in image is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A at a predetermined timing regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated.

That is, during the period during which the split effect is executed, regardless of whether the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed, and regardless of whether the operation of the push button 31B is valid, By leaving the push button 31B in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) instead of the lighting mode, the player can easily grasp which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100 (whether it is the true effect). It is not possible.

In the present embodiment, during execution of the divided effect, an operation promoting effect is provided in which the operation promoting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A. Although an executable example has been shown, this form is not limiting, and during execution of the divisional effect, the operation promotion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. Then, the operation prompting effect may not be executed.

Also, unlike the above example, during execution of the split effect, the operation promotion effect may not be executed in either the first effect image display region 27TM100A or the second effect image display region 27TM200A. For example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with a split effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects an advance notice effect with an operation promotion effect in the effect determination process at the time of variation start. Instead, another type of advance notice effect may be selected. That is, the types of advance notice effects that can be executed when the split effects are not executed include the advance notice effects accompanied by the operation promotion effects, but the types of advance notice effects that can be executed when the split effects are executed include may be configured not to include the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation promoting effect.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed when the split effect is not executed, the push button 31B is switched from the normal mode (extinguishing mode) to the lighting mode. , When the split effect is being executed, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (extinguishing mode) when the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. Therefore, the light-emitting device for changing the state of the push button 31B (for example, an LED that is installed inside the housing of the push button 31B and emits light during the valid operation period) is used to provide an effect corresponding to the period in which the divided effect is not executed. It can be called a device.

In this way, the effect device corresponding to the period in which the split effect is not executed may not be operated during the variable display period of the variation pattern with the split effect. For example, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern that does not involve a split effect, the effect control CPU 120 changes the state of the push button 31B in the effect determination process at the start of variation. However, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with a split effect, in the variation start time effect determination process, the push button 31B mode Execution of production using a device that changes is made undecidable.

In this manner, the predetermined effect device is not operated during the execution period of the split effect (or during the variable display of the variation pattern accompanying the split effect), thereby making it possible to determine which image, left or right, is the first effect image 27TM100. A player cannot easily comprehend this, and the interest of the divided presentation can be improved.

Here, if the division effect is executed, if the light emission control of the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED is executed in correspondence with each of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200, the LED The commands (electrical signals) to the control board 14 interfere with each other, which causes a problem that appropriate LED control becomes difficult. In this embodiment, the LED installed inside the housing of the push button 31B does not emit light during the execution period of the split effect (or during the variable display of the variation pattern accompanying the split effect), thereby causing such a problem. I try not to.

Also, an effect device (for example, a decorative LED or the like) that is operable only when the split effect is being executed (or when the variable display of the variation pattern with the split effect is being executed) may be provided. For example, a first decorative LED that does not emit light when the split effect is not being executed and emits light corresponding to the effect of the first effect image display area 27TM100A when the split effect is being executed, and the split effect is executed. A second decorative LED may be provided that does not emit light when not in use and emits light corresponding to the effect of the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the split effect is being executed. In this way, by providing an effect device dedicated to divided effects, it is possible to prevent the above-described problems from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (10), the effect control CPU 120 causes the player to push the button within the operation valid period during which the operation prompting display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. 31B is performed, and at the timing when the push sensor 35B detects the operation (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 10-14), the cut-in image 27TM370C displaying the characters "great chance!" A cut-in notice effect to be displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A is executed.

At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the cut-in image 27TM370B is continuously displayed as the effect image based on [MOVIE B].

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (11), the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the cut-in image 27TM370C displaying the characters "great chance!!" in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display of the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "chance!" 2. In the effect image display area 27TM200A, the characters "battle" and the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed (timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Further, at this time, two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed along with the characters "expectation" in the lower part of the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In this way, as effect images based on [Movie B] being reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, images related to the battle effect of Super Reach A (images of friend character 27TM500 and enemy character A (27TM510A), and 2 Star-shaped object images 27TM550) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (12), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display of the cut-in image 27TM370C displaying the characters "great chance!!" in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, The first effect image display area 27TM100A is caused to display the character "battle" together with the friend character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) (timing of T14 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Further, at this time, four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed along with the characters "Expectation" in the lower portion of the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

Thus, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, as effect images corresponding to the super reach B battle effect designated by the variation pattern designation command, images of the friend character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B), and Four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed.

In response to the development of the super ready-to-win effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. The effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100 without enlarging the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period from T14 to T15 shown in FIG. 10-14. During this enlarged display period, the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200, and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). mode).

That is, the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 in the enlarged display period is in the relationship of the second effect image 27TM200<the first effect image 27TM100. Accordingly, the displayed area of the second effect image 27TM200 is reduced (see FIG. 10-18 (12)). In this way, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the visibility of the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period. will be enhanced. Then, the enlarged first effect image 27TM100 completely covers the second effect image 27TM200, thereby making the second effect image 27TM200 invisible (not displayed).

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (13), the effect control CPU 120 divides the first effect image 27TM100 at the timing (timing T15 shown in FIG. 10-14) when the first effect image 27TM100 is expanded to approximately the same size as the effect display area 27TM005A. end the performance. At the timing when the split effect is finished, the effect display area 27TM005A displays an image of the friend character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) as effect images corresponding to the super reach B battle effect specified by the variation pattern specification command, and , four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed. Furthermore, after the split effect is completed, by blinking the four star-shaped object images 27TM550 displayed at the bottom of the screen, a plurality of expectations (2 stars) indicated to the player during the execution of the split effect can be displayed. and 4 stars), the degree of expectation (4 stars) finally selected corresponding to the variable display is reported.

That is, even after the end of the split effect, the effect information (the images of the friend character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) and the four star-shaped objects displayed in the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect is retained). Since the effect information common to the image 27TM550) is continuously displayed on the screen, the player can enjoy the effect (super reach B battle effect) corresponding to the hidden first effect image 27TM100. I can understand that it continues.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, a split effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed on the right part of the screen, and the left part of the screen A second effect image 27TM200 is displayed. In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect based on the variation pattern designation command and the setting suggestion effect determined based on the effect determination process at the time of variation start may be executed. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a predetermined movie corresponding to the variation pattern is reproduced, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Hypothetically, in a state in which the split effect is being executed, if the setting suggesting effect is executed for each of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 that are displayed in parallel on the left and right sides, which setting on the left or right is executed? A problem arises that the player is confused as to whether the set value should be estimated based on the suggestive effect. In this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring by not executing the setting suggestion effect in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image show the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect (two times and one time), and the mode of the cut-in image (" Big Chance!!” and “Chance!”), appearing characters (character B and character A), etc., can be made different in terms of display information related to the degree of expectation of a big hit. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the divided presentation.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" is selected, two pseudo-runs are executed in the first effect image 27TM100, whereas only one pseudo-run is executed in the second effect image 27TM200. In addition, in the first effect image 27TM100, the characters "big chance!!" with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit are displayed, while in the second effect image 27TM200, the characters "chance!" !” is displayed. Further, in the first effect image 27TM100, the character B (27TM510B) develops into a super reach B with a high expectation of a big hit among the super reach, and the character B (27TM510B) appears. Character A (27TM510A) appears after developing into Super Reach A with a low degree of expectation.

Thus, the first effect image 27TM100 with a longer display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high degree of expectation for a big hit than the second effect image 27TM200 with a shorter display period. In this example, the second effect image 27TM200 is an effect image based on Movie B (Long). Also in the case of , the first effect image 27TM100 with a longer display period has a higher ratio of displaying effect information with a high degree of expectation for a big hit than the second effect image 27TM200 with a shorter display period.

With such an effect configuration, the player has a sense of expectation that the first effect image 27TM100 is the one that displays the effect information with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and the interest in the split effect can be improved. can.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, descriptions of parts common to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted. Unlike the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment can execute setting suggesting effects in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

FIG. 10-20 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of variation in the second embodiment. As shown in steps S27TM2000 to S27TM2030, the gaming machine of the second embodiment determines whether or not to execute the third setting suggesting effect and the effect mode of the third setting suggesting effect, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment. Thus, the third setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Further, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, whether or not to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode of the fourth setting suggestion effect are determined, and the first effect image display area 27TM100A corresponds to the first effect image 27TM100. It is possible to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect.

In addition, as shown in steps S27TM2040 to S27TM2050, the gaming machine of the second embodiment determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, similarly to the game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, a cut-in announcement effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

Here, in the variation start time effect determination process of the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern involving a split effect. (Step S27TM3000). Then, if the variation pattern involves a split effect (YES in step S27TM3000), the presence or absence of execution of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect are determined, Whether or not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect are determined (step S27TM3010).

The fifth setting suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting a set value by the display color of the first effect image frame 27TM110 corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. The fifth setting suggestion effect is also an effect of suggesting a set value by the display color of the second effect image frame 27TM210 corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A1), when the setting value of the gaming machine is any one of 1, 3, and 5, that is, when it is an odd setting, 60% It is decided not to execute the fifth set suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 30%, and it is decided to execute the fifth set suggestion effect of the blue mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 30%. Then, at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100. On the other hand, if the set value of the gaming machine is any one of 2, 4, and 6, that is, if it is set to an even number, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is produced at a rate of 60%. It is decided not to execute it, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestive effect in the blue mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 10%, and the red color corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is determined at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the mode.

In this embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white. Further, when it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggesting effect in the blue mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue and corresponds to the first effect image 27TM100. When it is determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red.

Therefore, when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue, the player has a high possibility that the set value is an odd number. Infer that the value is likely to be even. Also, when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white, it is understood that the setting value is not suggested in the first effect image frame 27TM110.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A2), when the setting value of the gaming machine is any one of 1, 3, and 5, that is, when it is an odd setting, 80% It is decided not to execute the fifth set suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 11%, and it is decided to execute the fifth set suggestion effect of the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 11%. Then, at a rate of 9%, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. On the other hand, if the set value of the game machine is any one of 2, 4, and 6, that is, if it is set to an even number, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is produced at a rate of 80%. Decided not to execute, determined to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 9%, and red corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 11% It is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the aspect.

In this embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white. Further, when it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggesting effect in the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue and corresponds to the second effect image 27TM200. When it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

Therefore, when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue, the player has a high possibility that the setting value is an odd number. Infer that the value is likely to be even. Also, when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white, it is understood that no set value is suggested in the second effect image frame 27TM210.

In this way, the common points between the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are: (1) the fifth setting suggestion effect was executed; However, if the fifth setting suggestion effect is not executed, the effect image frame is displayed in white. (2) The effect image frame is displayed in blue. When the effect image frame is displayed in red, the set value is more likely to be an odd number, and when the effect image frame is displayed in red, the set value is more likely to be an even number.

On the other hand, the execution ratio (40%) of the fifth set suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution ratio (20%) of the fifth set suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Also, the ratio of odd-numbered set values when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue is higher than the ratio of odd-numbered set values when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue. The ratio of even-numbered set values when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red is higher than the ratio of even-numbered set values when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

Thus, the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. In addition, the ratio of the set value suggested by the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 to the actual setting value of the gaming machine corresponds to the fifth setting suggestion corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. The set value suggested by the effect is higher than the ratio corresponding to the actual set value of the gaming machine. That is, the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

In this way, it is possible to make the mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the fifth setting suggestion effect is executed along with execution of the split effect, and FIG. 10-2 (1) and (2) of the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a corresponding diagram; As shown in FIG. 10-22 (1), before execution of the split effect, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, as decoration identification information The variable display of the decoration pattern (main effect pattern) is performed. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , and in the first small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect display of two sets of combinations of the background image and the decorative pattern based on the background image and the decorative pattern among the information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A along with the execution of the divided effect. Appear on area 27TM005A. One of the combinations becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-22(2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first effect image frame 27TM110 together with the first effect image frame 27TM110 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A in accordance with the execution of the divided effect. The effect image 27TM100 is displayed, and the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed together with the second effect image frame 27TM210 in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen based on the decision to execute the effect control of the first pattern. ing.

Then, in the first design display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the first decoration design as the decoration identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the variability display of the first special design. In the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the effect image 27TM200, the second decoration symbol as the decoration identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed first special symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first small symbols in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-22(2), the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red color based on the fact that it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100. , and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue based on the fact that it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestive effect of the blue mode corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

Here, in this example, when the divided effect is executed, both the fifth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggesting effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed. there is Not limited to such an example, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue or red), while the second effect image 27TM200 The corresponding fifth setting suggestion effect may not be executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white). Also, while the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue or red), the fifth setting suggestion corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed. Effect may not be executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white).

Also, when the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed in a common mode (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in blue, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in red).

FIG. 10-23 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when divided effects are executed in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 10-14 of the first embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 10-23, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-14, at the start of the variation of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed. Effect control of the first pattern displayed on the left part of the screen is executed, and a split effect is executed in which movie B (long), which has a long playback period among the types of movie B, is played, and a type with a high degree of expectation is executed. It is determined to be "super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-run twice (type Y)]" in which Y's pseudo-run is executed twice.

As shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23, in the second embodiment, during the period in which the divided effects are being executed, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 A corresponding fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed in parallel. That is, the fifth setting suggestion effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in which the ratio of execution of the effect with high expectation for big hit is high, and the second effect image display area 27TM200A in which the ratio of execution of effect with low expectation for big hit is high. The fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed in parallel.

FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the divided effect of the second embodiment ends. 10-24 (12) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-18 (12) of the first embodiment, and FIG. 10-24 (13) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-19 (13) of the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a corresponding diagram;

In response to the development of the super ready-to-win effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red mode is being executed. 27TM100 is enlarged and displayed. The effect control CPU 120 enlarges the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue mode is executed during the enlarged display period of T14 to T15 shown in FIG. 10-14. The combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 in which the fifth setting suggesting effect in the red mode is executed is gradually enlarged and displayed. In this enlarged display period, the combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 (the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the The display layer is higher than the combination of the 2 effect images 27TM200 and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in front of the player.

That is, the display priority of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 during the enlarged display period has a relationship of second effect image frame 27TM210<first effect image frame 27TM110, and the first effect image frame. Along with the enlarged display of 27TM110, the displayed area of the second effect image frame 27TM210 shrinks (see FIG. 10-24 (12)). In this manner, the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image frame 27TM110 is lower than that of the second effect image frame 27TM210 during the enlarged display period. Visibility will be improved. Then, the enlarged first effect image frame 27TM110 completely covers the second effect image frame 27TM210, thereby making the second effect image frame 27TM210 invisible (not displayed).

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (13), the effect control CPU 120 controls the timing when the first effect image frame 27TM110 expands to substantially the same size as the frame of the effect display area 27TM005A (timing T15 shown in FIG. 10-23). to end the split performance.

As described above, when the split effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A. It is possible to improve the interest of setting suggestion production. Here, since it is possible to make the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A different, the split effect It is possible to further improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance that is executed in parallel in the .

However, in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, a third setting suggestion effect ( Setting 6 confirmation effect) is not executed.

Supposing that a third setting suggesting effect suggesting a high set value is executed in response to the second effect image 27TM200 in which the display period is short and the effect with a low degree of expectation is executed at a high rate, the first effect When the third setting suggestion effect corresponding to the image 27TM100 is not executed, the second effect image 27TM200 is hidden at an early timing, which may disappoint the player. Also, the player has doubts about the reliability of the third setting suggesting effect executed in response to the second effect image 27TM200. In the present embodiment, although the fifth setting suggesting effect can be executed in response to the second effect image 27TM200, the third setting suggesting effect suggesting a specific set value with high reliability is not executed. I try not to cause problems like this.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 27TM)
Next, a modified example of the [characteristic portion 27TM] will be described.

(1) As shown in the characteristic portion 16TM described above, the setting suggestion effect may suggest a set value based on the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the mini-slot 16TM030 to be displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5 and below the active display 16TM003, and variably displays the mini-slot 16TM030. By doing so, a setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first setting suggesting effect as the effect suggesting the currently set setting value. In this first setting suggestion effect, a combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] as a combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. By doing so, it is a production that the role of "Bell" is established. That is, based on the stop display of the combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player can set the set value. It recognizes that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting has been executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G) described above, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect differs according to the setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is executed. will be In the present embodiment, the processing for determining the effect at the time of starting the variation is executed each time the variable display is performed, so whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is to be executed is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the above-mentioned first mini-slot variable display is [Bell] or "Loss". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed. The player is also interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect).

In this way, the configuration that can execute the first setting suggestion effect can be applied to the gaming machine of the first embodiment or the gaming machine of the second embodiment. However, while the first setting suggesting effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed during the period in which the divided effect is being executed, the first setting suggesting effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed. do.

Since the first setting suggesting effect suggests the set value by the number of times it is executed, it is difficult for the player to guess the set value just by looking at the winning combination of the variable display of the displayed mini-slot. is. From such a feature of the first setting suggesting effect, if a first mini-slot corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and a second mini-slot corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed during execution of the split effect, If the first setting suggestion effect is executed in parallel in the first mini-slot and the second mini-slot, the player will be confused. Therefore, it is assumed that the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed while the divided effect is being executed.

(2) It should be noted that, not only in the form shown in the above modified example (1), during the variable display period based on the variation pattern with the split effect, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second None of the first setting suggestion effects corresponding to the effect image 27TM200 may be executed.

For example, among the variable display periods based on the variation pattern with the split effect, the period during which the split effect is not executed (the period before the split effect is executed and the period after the split effect is executed) is the lower center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 ( In the mini-slot 16TM030 displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003, which corresponds to neither the first effect image display area 27TM100A nor the second effect image display area 27TM200A). 1-set suggestion effect can be executed, but during the execution period of the split effect, both the first-set suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the first-set suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are performed. You can choose not to run it.

Thus, when the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 that does not correspond to either the first effect image display area 27TM100A or the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the execution period of the split effect In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the middle mini-slot 16TM030, the mini-slot symbols may be displayed continuously so that the mini-slot symbols are not stopped. With such effect control, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed within the effect display area 27TM005A (entire screen) during the execution period of the split effect.

(3) In addition, in the above-described first and second embodiments, in at least one of the first effect image display region 27TM100A and the second effect image display region 27TM200A during the execution period of the divided effect, Although an example in which any type of setting suggestion effect can be executed has been shown, this is not limited to such a form. In both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type.

During the execution period of the split effect (or during the variable display period based on the variation pattern with the split effect), the effect display area 27TM005A including the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A (the entire screen ), the setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type.

(4) In the above embodiment, the period during which the split effect is executed has a lower rate of change in the display mode of the active display than the period during which the split effect is not executed. Regardless of the form, during the period when the split effect is executed, the rate of change of the display mode of the active display may be higher than during the period when the split effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in how the active display changes in response to the execution of the split effect.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example was described in which the setting suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the setting value of the gaming machine. It may be an effect that suggests whether or not the set value has been changed when the switch is turned on. For example, when the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode for changing the set value when the power of the game machine is turned on, the game machine is not controlled to the setting change mode when the power of the game machine is turned on. A predetermined setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the case.

(6) In the above-described second embodiment, the types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A (the third setting suggestion effect, the fourth setting suggestion effect, and the fifth setting suggestion effect); There is a type of setting suggestion effect (fifth setting suggestion effect) that can be executed in the effect image display area 27TM200A, and a setting suggestion that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A but is not executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. While there are types of effects (third setting suggesting effect, fourth setting suggesting effect), the type of setting suggesting effect that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but is not executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. described a non-existent example.

Without being limited to such a form, it is also possible to provide a type of setting suggestion effect that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but is not executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. For example, the fifth setting suggestion effect may be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, but may not be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(7) In the above embodiment, execution is possible only in one of the first effect image display region 27TM100A and the second effect image display region 27TM200A (for example, the first effect image display region 27TM100A), and the other region. (For example, the second effect image display area 27TM200A) has been described with respect to effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect, etc.) that are not executed, but these effects are not limited to such a form, and can be performed in the other area. can also be performed, and may be performed at a lower rate in the other region than in the other region.

(8) The game machine shown in the above embodiment, for example, similar to the game machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-191660, has a right-eye image (R) and a left-eye image (R) for forming a stereoscopic image. L) are alternately arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed (for example, an image liquid crystal panel), and is provided in front of the display body to prevent the right eye image (R) from being visually recognized by the player's left eye. and a parallax forming body (for example, a lenticular sheet) for preventing the left-eye image (L) from being viewed by the player's right eye. may

Here, in the ROM of the effect control board, image data of a stereoscopic image (for stereoscopic vision) (image data of the image for the right eye (R) and image data of the image for the left eye (L)) and non-stereoscopic image (for planar vision) ) image data is stored. The display control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the VDP) causes the image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) to be alternately arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed on the display body based on the image data of the stereoscopic image. 1 control and second control for displaying the non-stereoscopic image on the display based on the image data of the non-stereoscopic image.

When the display control means executes the first control, only the image for the right eye (R) is visually recognized from the player's right eye without the image for the left eye (L) being visually recognized via the parallax forming body, and the game is played. From the left eye of the person, only the image for the left eye (L) is visually recognized without the image for the right eye (R) being visually recognized through the parallax forming body. A fusion image is produced at the intersection of a straight line connecting the player's right eye and the image for the right eye (line of sight of the right eye) and a straight line connecting the left eye and the image for the left eye of the player (the line of sight of the left eye). Stereoscopic viewing based on the image for the right eye and the image for the right eye becomes possible.

On the other hand, when the display control means executes the second control, no parallax is formed between the non-stereoscopic image viewed from the player's right eye and the non-stereoscopic image viewed from the player's left eye. . As a result, the intersection of the straight line connecting the player's right eye and the non-stereoscopic image (the line of sight of the right eye) and the straight line connecting the player's left eye and the non-stereoscopic image (the line of sight of the left eye) is the display position of the non-stereoscopic image. , and becomes a planar view state. For example, a predetermined (single) right-eye image may be used as the non-stereoscopic image, and a predetermined (single) left-eye image may be used as the non-stereoscopic image.

In this way, in a gaming machine equipped with display control means capable of switching between the state of executing the first control and the state of executing the second control, during the execution period of the split effect (or during the execution of the split effect) During the fluctuation period based on the accompanying fluctuation pattern), the second control may be executed without executing the first control. For example, during the execution period of the split effect shown in FIG. 10-14 or FIG. 10-23 (the period from T2 to T15), the second control is executed without executing the first control, and the battle effect image after the end of the split effect (For example, the image shown in (13) in FIG. 10-19 or (13) in FIG. 10-24) is switched from the second control to the first control (to enable stereoscopic viewing) at the timing of displaying. may

Supposing that the first control is performed while the split effect is being executed to enable stereoscopic viewing, both the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort. Regarding the image of (1), the image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) must be prepared in advance so as to produce a fusion image having an appropriate depth in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) of the screen as viewed from the player. Gone. In the present embodiment, by not executing the first control that enables stereoscopic vision when the split effect is being executed, the effect data to be prepared is prevented from excessively increasing.

(Details of display control unit)
Next, a detailed description will be given of a configuration for executing the divided effects shown in the above [Description of Characteristic Portion 27TM]. FIG. 10-25 is a configuration diagram showing the display control unit 123. As shown in FIG. Rendering circuit 1510 in VDP (Video Display Processor) 150, when the display control command input from effect control CPU 120 via CPU interface 1520 is a command to read image data from CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 160, reads necessary image data from the CGROM 160 via the CG bus interface 1530 and outputs it to the decoder 1550 . The CGROM 160 stores image data encoded (data compressed) according to MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) or the like. The decoder 1550 decompresses the image data read from the CGROM 160 and writes the decompressed image data to the drawing material data RAM 1560 .

The drawing circuit 1510 uses the image data stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 to generate frame image data for displaying the image of one frame on the image display device 5 and stores it in the drawing area of the VRAM (Video RAM) 170 . Write. In this embodiment, an object to be displayed, which is formed by a set of polygons, is arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and the object is displayed on the virtual screen by rendering processing. Frame image data corresponding to an image obtained by projection is generated. The drive circuit 180 outputs R (red), G (green), and B (blue) image signals and synchronization signals to the image display device 5 based on the frame image data in the drawing area. The image display device 5 performs screen display by, for example, a dot matrix system that drives a large number of picture elements (pixels).

The VDP 1500 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM 160 may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used as long as it is configured using

Next, display modes of effect images using three-dimensional object images will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-26 to 10-30. As shown in FIG. 10-26, when drawing an object image, the VDP 1500 in the display control unit 123 draws an object OB to be displayed formed by a set of polygons into a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) image. When it is assumed that the object is placed in space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and the object is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint EY (for example, the viewpoint EY0) by rendering processing, a position at a predetermined distance from the viewpoint EY Arithmetic processing is performed to obtain an image IM obtained by projecting onto the virtual screen SC arranged in the image plane SC, and the image IM is displayed on the image display device 5 by controlling the drive circuit 180 (see FIG. 10-25). In this embodiment, the image IM projected onto the virtual screen SC is rendered by perspective projection.

In the following description, the x-axis is the axis in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction of the screen). It is assumed that the direction toward the left of the screen is the negative direction. The y-axis is the axis in the vertical direction (vertical direction of the screen). It is assumed that the heading direction is the negative direction. Also, the z-axis is an axis in the vertical direction (depth direction of the screen) orthogonal to the screen, and the direction from the origin (0, 0, 0) toward the back of the screen is the positive direction. It is assumed that the direction from the to the front of the screen is the negative direction.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27, the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 is based on an effect image EG (an example of an image simulating the effect display area 27TM005A) in which the variable display of the effect symbols is executed. Then, by performing texture mapping on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (Fig. 10-27 (1)), the xy plane of the object OB The effect image EG is synthesized (mapped). As a result, the xy plane of the object OB and the effect image EG are integrated in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (Fig. 10-27 (2)). By executing the rendering processing for the object OB, the same rendering processing is executed for the effect image EG.

The drawing of the object image when performing the variable display of the effect symbols is performed when the display control section 123 is controlled according to the contents of the process data. The effect control CPU 120 outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the contents of the process data. The display control unit 123 includes information specifying the data of the object OB to be displayed at that timing. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 selects the data of the object OB to be displayed from the CGROM 160 according to the display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520 . Here, the data of the object OB includes the position information of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, the coordinate information of the polygon forming the object OB, the coordinate information of the texture, and the like. Data of the selected object OB to be displayed is stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 . The data of the selected object OB to be displayed is added with information (effect designation information) indicating which effect the data of the object OB corresponds to. Based on the effect designation information, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the image data of the selected object OB to be displayed is an effect image object or another background object. 1510 is used to execute drawing of object OB.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27, a set of left, middle, and right decoration patterns are variably displayed in the effect image EG synthesized on the xy plane of the object OB. By changing (transforming or moving) the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, the effect image EG in which a set of left, middle, and right ornamental patterns are variably displayed is also changed (transformed or moved). will do. As a result, the aspect of the drawn object image (for example, the length and angle of the displayed straight line) changes, and accordingly, the aspect of the displayed decorative pattern (for example, the size, length and width of the displayed decorative pattern) changes. ratio, etc.) also change.

FIG. 10-28 shows an example of changing the position of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space by rotating the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space around the y-axis. FIG. 10-28(A) is a diagram showing an initial state when a rectangular parallelepiped object OB having an xy plane is synthesized with the effect image EG in the virtual three-dimensional space. FIG. 10-28 (B1) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the synthesis processing is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis. FIG. 10-28 (B2) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the compositing process is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when drawing an object image, a viewpoint (for example, a viewpoint EY0) corresponding to the object OB is set. The viewpoint EY0 in this example is set at a position facing the xy plane of the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, and the line of sight is set to be parallel to the z-axis. That is, the viewpoint EY0 is set to be the same as the viewpoint when the player views the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

The viewpoint EY0 shown in the example of FIGS. 10-29 is the midpoint ( o/2, p/2), which is a predetermined distance |r| [r is a real number, r<0] from the z-axis. That is, the viewpoint EY0 corresponding to the object OB in this example is positioned at a fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space.

The object OB is rendered as an image obtained by perspective projection onto the virtual screen SC, assuming that it is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. Therefore, when the synthesized object OB is in the initial state, as shown in FIG. 28A, an image is displayed in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are of the same size. Further, when the synthesized object OG is rotated 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. An image is displayed in which the decorative pattern has the second largest size and the right decorative pattern has the smallest size. Further, when the synthesized object OG is rotated 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. An image is displayed in which the decorative pattern has the second largest size and the left decorative pattern has the smallest size.

As described above, the VDP 1500 in the display control unit 123 performs texture mapping based on the effect image EG on the object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional space as synthesis processing, and converts the texture-mapped object OB to By changing (deforming or moving) the three-dimensional object OB after the change (deformation or movement), an image of the three-dimensional object OB viewed from the viewpoint EY0 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM. As a result, the generated image IM naturally reflects the display mode after the effect image EG mapped to the object OB is changed (deformed or moved). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control unit 123 compared to the case where the display mode of the effect image EG is sequentially calculated based only on the data of the effect image EG that is not associated with the data of the object OB. becomes.

Note that in the example of FIG. 10-29, the viewpoint EY0 is a fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The position of the viewpoint to be set may be changed according to the game state, the variation pattern, the advance notice effect, the degree of expectation for the big hit, and the like, without being limited to such a form. Also, when arranging a plurality of objects OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, a corresponding viewpoint may be set for each object OB. For example, as shown below, when two objects OB1 and OB2 are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, a viewpoint EY1 corresponding to the object OB1 and a viewpoint EY2 corresponding to the object OB2 are set, and the object OB1 For object OB2, an image obtained when viewed from viewpoint EY1 may be drawn, and for object OB2, an image obtained when viewed from viewpoint EY2 may be drawn.

For example, when the above-described divided effect is executed, the VDP 1500 displays the effect image EG1 in which the first decoration pattern is displayed on the xy plane of the cuboid object OB1 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. , and performs a first synthesis process for synthesizing the . Then, the object OB1 subjected to the first synthesis process is rotated 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28B2), and the rotated object OB1 is viewed from the viewpoint EY1. An image IM1 (an image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100) is generated by drawing the image viewed from above by perspective projection. In addition, the VDP 1500 executes a second synthesizing process of synthesizing the effect image EG2 displaying the second decorative pattern with the xy plane of the cuboid object OB2 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. . Then, the object OB2 subjected to the second synthesis process is rotated 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28B1), and the rotated object OB2 is viewed from the viewpoint EY2. An image IM2 (an image corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200) is generated by drawing the image when viewed from above by perspective projection.

Then, the VDP 1500 performs display control to superimpose the image IM1 on the right side of the background image and display the image IM2 on the left side of the background image. A composite image including the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 superimposed on the image is displayed as a split effect effect image.

Here, when an image of the changed (rotated) object OB1 viewed from the viewpoint EY1 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM1, the viewpoint EY1 is assumed to be a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) When viewed from a position distant from the viewpoint EY0 by positioning at a fixed point (p1, q1, r1) [p1, q1, r1 are real numbers, r1<0, and |r|<|r1|] in space is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM1 (∵|r|<|r1|). As a result, the image IM1 (image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100) is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A which is smaller than the effect display area 27TM005A.

Similarly, when generating an image IM2 by drawing an image of the changed (rotated) object OB2 viewed from the viewpoint EY2 by perspective projection, the viewpoint EY2 is set to the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) Fixed point (p2, q2, r2) [p2, q2, r2 are real numbers, r2 < 0, and |r| is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM2 (∵|r|<|r2|). As a result, image IM2 (image corresponding to second effect image 27TM200) is displayed in second effect image display area 27TM200A, which is an area smaller than the entire screen of image display device 5. FIG.

Note that, in the example of the above-described split effect, as a mode in which viewpoints are arranged and drawn in the virtual three-dimensional space, a plurality of viewpoints (in this example, two objects OB1 and OB2) corresponding to each of the plurality of objects (OB1 and OB2) are displayed. In this example, a multi-viewpoint drawing mode is adopted in which an image obtained when viewed from two viewpoints (EY1 and EY2) is drawn. ) from one common viewpoint EY1′ may be adopted.

Note that in this embodiment, the effect image EG corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is displayed on the xy side of the object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space on the z-axis negative direction side (on the front side of the screen). When a compositing process (texture mapping) for compositing onto a plane is executed, the object OB subjected to the compositing process is changed (deformed or moved), and the object OB after the change (deformed or moved) is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. to the xy plane on the z-axis positive direction side (back side of the screen), and change (deform or move) the object OB for which the synthesis process has been performed, and after that change (deform or The image IM3 may be generated by drawing an image of the object OB (after movement) viewed from the viewpoint EY3 by perspective projection.

In this way, by changing (deforming or moving) the object OB in a state where the background image is synthesized with the object OB, the aspect of the background image displayed on the entire screen of the effect display area 27TM005A of the image display device 5 can be changed. It becomes possible to execute a changing Shake Vision effect. Note that the shake vision effect described above has not only the effect of changing the aspect of the background image synthesized with the object OB, but also the effect of changing the aspect of the effect image EG synthesized with the same object OB. This shake vision performance may be executed as a performance suggesting the end of the performance being executed, or may be executed as a performance when the execution period of the performance being executed becomes longer than a predetermined period, and the performance is a big hit. It may be executed as a chance-up effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is high.

In the above embodiment, the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 of the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command generates a predetermined movie (movie A (short)) corresponding to the specified variation pattern as the second effect image 27TM200. , movie A (long), movie B (short), or movie B (long)). Here, regarding the second effect image 27TM200, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the original image (for example, IM2) for forming the second effect image 27TM200 is placed in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. may be displayed without performing a compositing process of compositing with the three-dimensional object OB2 placed in the .

For example, in the first movie, the right decorative design is the largest size, the middle decorative design is the second largest size, and the left decorative design is the smallest size, and the left decorative design is the largest size and the middle decorative design is the second. A second movie in which the second movie is displayed in a large size and the right decorative pattern is displayed in the smallest size is prepared in advance (stored in the ROM of the effect control board in association with the variation pattern). Then, when the divided effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is superimposed on the right portion of the background image, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed. When the first movie is reproduced within the range and the divided effect based on the effect control of the second pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is superimposed and displayed on the left part of the background image, The second movie is reproduced within the range of the second effect image frame 27TM210.

As described above, the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. It may be made displayable. The first effect image 27TM100 can also be displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. may be Also, a period during which display control for generating an image based on an object OB arranged in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space is executed within a variable display period (or within a divided rendering period) accompanied by a split effect. A predetermined effect image EG (for example, a movie image corresponding to a variation pattern) is superimposed and displayed on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. The period during which display control is executed may be switched.

In addition to moving (rotating) the object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z), the object OB may be deformed. For example, the rectangular parallelepiped object OB placed in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z) may be transformed into a cube by changing the coordinates of the vertices of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB. Further, the cuboid object OB is divided into two cuboid objects OB, one cuboid object OB after division is combined with the image corresponding to the first effect image frame 27T110, and the other cuboid object OB An image corresponding to the second effect image frame 27TM210 may be combined with the object OB.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10... General winning port 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Sound control board 14... LED control board 15... Relay board 17... Special variable winning ball device 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting Mouth switch 23... First count switch 24... Second count switch 30... Ball-hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Pass gate 100... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing control according to a set value,
setting permission state control means capable of controlling a setting permission state for permitting setting of the setting value;
setting confirmation state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value;
specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting permission state has been set;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
command transmission means capable of transmitting a command related to a game;
a game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and having display means capable of displaying the set values;
variable display means capable of executing variable display;
a pending storage means capable of storing, as pending storage, information relating to variable display that has not been executed;
a signal output means capable of outputting a signal;
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the command transmitted from the command transmitting means;
and an informing means capable of informing that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state ,
the specific information is erased based on the completion of control of the setting permission state;
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped without the control of the setting permission state being terminated,
error notification means capable of executing error notification in the display means based on the fact that the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
The reserved storage is initialized when being controlled to the setting permission state,
when the setting confirmation state is controlled, the pending storage is not initialized;
The signal output means is
capable of outputting a specific signal when being controlled to the setting permission state;
capable of outputting the specific signal when being controlled to the setting confirmation state;
The setting confirmation state control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state to the setting confirmation state when power supply to the game machine is started and before the interrupt process is executed,
The interrupt processing is executed when the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt processing is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
The command transmission means is controlled to the setting permission state, to the setting confirmation state, and to neither the setting permission state nor the setting confirmation state. Also, before the interrupt process is executed, a setting command indicating the setting value can be transmitted to the effect executing means,
The notification about being controlled to the setting confirmation state is performed when being controlled to the setting confirmation state,
The specific signal is output until a predetermined period elapses after control to the setting confirmation state is completed after being controlled to the setting confirmation state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images